You are on page 1of 306

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

(CONVERSATION)

Read this manual before performing work.

2017/01/26 1 eCOM3COPRTP
Introduction

Thank you for purchasing this machine.


Always be sure to read this manual carefully first, in order to use the machine
functions properly and safely.
Always be sure to carefully read this Programming Manual as well as the
Operation Manual before use.

This manual gives a description of conversation language programming.


This machine can be used to carry out drilling, tapping and facing.

This machine manual is divided into the following sections.


• Operation Manual
This manual describes the operation procedure for the machine.
• Installation Manual
This manual describes the machine’s installation procedure and
inspections.
• Programming Manual
This manual provides a program description.

Brother is not responsible or liable for accidents that occur during special
machine use or handling that does not follow the general safety usage
guidelines.
Keep this manual for future reference.
Attach this manual to the machine if it is resold.
Contact the nearest Brother sales office or Brother approved service dealer if
this manual or the safety labels are damaged, lost or missing. (Charges apply)

The re-exporting and resale of this machine is regulated by Japan’s export laws and
regulations in accordance with international export management.
When exporting, permission from the exporting country’s government and/or from the
Japanese government may be required.
Contact a Brother Industries dealer in advance before re-transferring, reselling or
re-exporting this machine.

Copying and reprinting all or part of the content in this manual without permission is illegal.
The content of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
Brother has taken steps to ensure this manual is accurate and complete. However, if you notice
or suspect that there is an error, please contact the nearest Brother sales office or Brother
approved service dealer.

2017/01/26 2 eCOM3COPRTP
How to Read This Manual
This manual is divided into the following sections.
(1) Overview ------ A summary of the content is provided for the corresponding section.

(2) Warning -------- A warning is provided for any hazards that could potentially cause serious bodily
injury, death or damage to the machine.
The hazards are described in the following order.
(2-1) Hazard level
(2-2) Type of hazard
(2-3) Potential damage
(2-4) Safety directions to avoid danger

(3) Operation procedure --- The procedure describes how to operate each function.

(4) Screenshot --- A screenshot is inserted into places to highlight certain points in the operation
procedure. The screenshot messages are shown at an approximate position and may
differ slightly from the actual position of the line or column. The same applies to the
font.

(5) Illustration ---- Illustrations, such as explanatory drawings, diagrams that show the dimensions,
positioning, ranges, figures or configurations, are used in certain places where a
written explanation alone may be hard to understand.

(2) Warning (3) Operation procedure (1) Overview

1.3 Take the necessary steps to ensure 1.3.1 Before starting operation
safe operation Review the following items before starting
operation.
(1) Turn the main power breaker handle on the control
box door to the OFF position.
Do not touch the primary power and terminal for the
WARNING main power breaker because it has a high voltage.
(2) A sign must be posted to warn others that work is
You may break or fracture your foot in progress.
if you drop a heavy object on it. (3) Do not let others approach the machine or the
moving parts on the machine.
Therefore, use safety footwear when (4) Make sure that there are no unnecessary objects
lifting or carrying heavy objects. around the machine.

1-2 1-3

(5) Illustration (4) Screenshot

2017/01/26 3 eCOM3COPRTP
(This page was intentionally left blank.)

2017/01/26 4 eCOM3COPRTP
Contents

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE OF CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM ---- 1-1


1.1 Conversational Program Creation Method ----------------------------------- 1-2
1.1.1 Outline of conversational program creation method -------------------------------------------------- 1-2
1.1.2 To switch conversation/NC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
1.1.3 Creation method -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
1.2 Outline of Program Types and Programming ------------------------------- 1-4
1.2.1 Mutual relationship between program creation and edit process ----------------------------------- 1-4
1.2.2 Composition of conversational program and flow of programming ------------------------------- 1-5
1.3 Procedure to Create and Execute Conversational Program ----------- 1-6
1.3.1 Step 1 (preparation for creating a program) ------------------------------------------------------------ 1-8
1.3.2 Step 2 (To input machining data) ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9
1.3.3 Step 3 (To set workpiece machining order) -----------------------------------------------------------1-11
1.3.4 Step 4 (To set tool pattern) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-11
1.3.5 Step 5 (To set cutting conditions) -----------------------------------------------------------------------1-12
1.3.6 Step 6 (preparation for operation) -----------------------------------------------------------------------1-12
1.3.7 Step 7 (To mount tools) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
1.3.8 Step 8 (test operation) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-15

CHAPTER 2 MACHINING DATA ----------------------------------------- 2-1


2.1 Machining Data (Basic)-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
2.1.1 What is machining data?----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
2.1.2 Setting the Machining data -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
2.1.2.1 Procedure to prepare machining data ------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
2.1.2.2 Keys used for setting machining data ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-4
2.1.3 Setting the Workpiece zero ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
2.1.3.1 Normal setting method ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-6
2.1.3.2 To use [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-7
2.1.4 Setting the Return height ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-10
2.1.5 Setting the Workpieces -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
2.1.6 Setting the Workpiece material --------------------------------------------------------------------------2-13
2.1.7 Setting the Job ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14
2.2 Setting the Drilling Job ------------------------------------------------------------ 2-15
2.2.1 Center hole drilling ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-15
2.2.2 Drilling ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-18
2.2.3 Tapping ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-19
2.2.4 Reaming ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-22
2.2.5 Counterbore drilling ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23
2.2.6 Counterbore tapping ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-24
2.2.7 Counterbore reaming --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-26
2.2.8 Rolled tapping ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-27
2.2.9 Counterbore rolled tapping -------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-27
2.2.10 Pattern list --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-28
2.3 Setting Milling System Job ------------------------------------------------------ 2-33
2.3.1 Milling ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-33
2.3.2 Facing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-38
2.3.3 Pocketing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-45
2.3.4 Contouring -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-55
2.3.5 Chamfering ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-71
2.4 To Set Non-cutting System Jobs ---------------------------------------------- 2-92
2.4.1 Coolant ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-92
2.4.2 Axis travel--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-92
2.4.3 Signal output ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-93
2.4.4 Subprograms (calls) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94
2.4.5 Program stop ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-94
2.4.6 Setting coordinate system --------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-95
2.5 Motion Call---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-101
2.5.1 Outline of motion calls ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-101
2.5.1.1 Function of motion call program and related machining data ----------------------------- 2-101
2.5.1.2 Motion call program edit ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-103
2.5.1.3 Notes on motion call program operation ------------------------------------------------------ 2-104

2019/06/16 1 eCOM3COPRCO
Contents

2.5.2 Motion list table ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-105


2.5.2.1 “1. Positioning” motion group ------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-105
2.5.2.2 “2. Cutting” motion group----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-106
2.5.2.3 “3. Spindle” motion group ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-107
2.5.2.4 “4. Dwell” motion group ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-107
2.5.2.5 “5. Absolute/Incremental” motion group ----------------------------------------------------- 2-107
2.5.2.6 “6. Miscellaneous function” motion group --------------------------------------------------- 2-107
2.5.2.7 “7. Diameter compensation function” motion group --------------------------------------- 2-108
2.5.2.8 “8. Measurement” motion group --------------------------------------------------------------- 2-108
2.5.3 Motion program value setting area table ------------------------------------------------------------- 2-109
2.5.4 Notes on cutting motions by motion calls and explanation --------------------------------------- 2-110
2.5.4.1 Arc cutting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-110
2.5.4.2 Single direction tapping ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-111
2.5.4.3 Helical threading motion ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-111
2.5.5 Miscellaneous function list for motion call ---------------------------------------------------------- 2-119
2.5.6 Diameter compensation in motion call --------------------------------------------------------------- 2-126
2.5.6.1 Tool diameter compensation of motion call program -------------------------------------- 2-126
2.5.6.2 Tool path in start-up ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-129
2.5.6.3 Tool path in offset mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-132
2.5.6.4 Tool path in offset cancel------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-139
2.5.6.5 If compensation direction is changed in offset mode --------------------------------------- 2-143
2.5.7 Automatic workpiece measurement by motion call ------------------------------------------------ 2-148
2.5.7.1 Automatic workpiece measurement ----------------------------------------------------------- 2-148
2.5.7.2 Angle measurement ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-149
2.5.7.3 Parallel measurement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-150
2.5.7.4 Circle center measurement ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-151
2.5.7.5 Z-axis height measurement---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152
2.5.7.6 Rotational measurement (X-axis 2 points) --------------------------------------------------- 2-153
2.5.7.7 Rotational measurement (Y-axis 2 points) --------------------------------------------------- 2-154
2.6 Finish Operation and Subprograms ----------------------------------------- 2-155
2.6.1 Ending a Main Program -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155
2.6.2 Setting a subprogram ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-156
2.6.3 Ending an edit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-157
2.6.4 Comment Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-159
2.7 Re-edit Machining Data ---------------------------------------------------------- 2-160
2.7.1 [F3] (Search) key ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-161
2.7.2 [INS] (insertion) key ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-162
2.7.3 [DEL] (deletion) key ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-164
2.7.4 [F6] [F6] (Copy job) / [F7] (Paste job) --------------------------------------------------------------- 2-164

CHAPTER 3 SCHEDULE PROGRAM ---------------------------------- 3-1


3.1 What is a Schedule Program? ---------------------------------------------------- 3-2
3.2 Schedule Program Edit-------------------------------------------------------------- 3-3
3.3 Re-edit Schedule Program --------------------------------------------------------- 3-5

CHAPTER 4 MACHINING SEQUENCE -------------------------------- 4-1


4.1 What Is Machining Sequence? --------------------------------------------------- 4-2
4.2 Procedure to Change Machining Sequence --------------------------------- 4-2
4.3 Contents of Machining Sequence ----------------------------------------------- 4-3
4.4 Machining sequence and Coordinate System Setting ------------------- 4-8
4.5 Execution of Non-cutting Jobs between Cutting Jobs----------------- 4-12
4.5.1 Program (job) flow ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-12
4.5.2 Classification of cutting jobs and non-cutting jobs --------------------------------------------------4-12
4.5.3 Example of execution of non-cutting jobs -------------------------------------------------------------4-12
4.5.4 Editing in operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-16

CHAPTER 5 TOOL PATTERNS ------------------------------------------ 5-1


5.1 Tool Patterns --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2
5.2 How to Change Tool Patterns----------------------------------------------------- 5-3

2019/06/16 2 eCOM3COPRCO
Contents

5.3 Editing during Operation ----------------------------------------------------------- 5-4


CHAPTER 6 CUTTING CONDITIONS ---------------------------------- 6-1
6.1 Cutting Conditions -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2
6.2 How to Change Cutting Conditions --------------------------------------------- 6-3
6.3 Editing during Operation ----------------------------------------------------------- 6-4

CHAPTER 7 OPERATION PREPARATION --------------------------- 7-1


7.1 Procedure to Edit Operation preparation ------------------------------------- 7-2
7.2 Procedure to Tool assignment --------------------------------------------------- 7-3
7.2.1 Procedure for assignment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3
7.2.2 If the place where the [?] key is pushed is not calculated -------------------------------------------- 7-5
7.2.3 Tool assignment screen and contents of information ------------------------------------------------- 7-6
7.2.4 To select a necessary tool --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-8
7.2.5 Forcible assignment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-9
7.2.6 To change machining functions -------------------------------------------------------------------------7-11
7.2.7 Tool check -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-12
7.2.8 Input for Tool length offset / Cutter compensation --------------------------------------------------7-12
7.2.9 Setting of the miscellaneous functions before cutting / after cutting------------------------------7-13
7.2.10 Dwell Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-13
7.3 Procedure to Re-assign Tools -------------------------------------------------- 7-15
7.3.1 When a tool is forcibly assigned or functions are changed -----------------------------------------7-15
7.3.2 When a job process is inserted to or deleted from machining data --------------------------------7-16
7.3.3 When assignment data is newly created ---------------------------------------------------------------7-17
7.4 Tool Assignment during Operation ------------------------------------------- 7-21
7.5 Compensation of Cutting Position -------------------------------------------- 7-22
7.5.1 Position relationship of cutting position compensation ---------------------------------------------7-22
7.5.2 Procedure to set compensation amount ----------------------------------------------------------------7-25
7.6 Workpiece Height Compensation --------------------------------------------- 7-27
7.7 Setting of Tool Change Positioning ------------------------------------------ 7-29
7.7.1 Search function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-30

CHAPTER 8 OPTIONS ---------------------------------------------------- 8-1-1


8.1 Automatic Workpiece Measurement ---------------------------------------- 8-1-1
1 Before Starting Automatic Workpiece Measurement ------------------------------------------------8-1-4
2 Probe Detection Signal Method Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------8-1-5
3 To Set Automatic Workpiece Measurement -----------------------------------------------------------8-1-6
4 Automatic Workpiece Measurement Commanding Method -------------------------------------- 8-1-11
4.1 Angle --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-1-11
4.2 Parallel ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-1-15
4.3 Circle Center ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-1-18
4.4 Z-axis Height ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-1-21
4.5 Rotation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-1-22
5 To Process with Measurement Results ---------------------------------------------------------------- 8-1-24
5.1 Display Screen of Measurement Results --------------------------------------------------------- 8-1-24
5.2 To Reflect Measurement Results to Workpiece Coordinate System ----------------------- 8-1-25

8.2 Index Table --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2-1


1 MDI Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2-2
1.1 Input Items for MDI Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------8-2-2
1.2 To Perform MDI Operation --------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2-6
1.2.1 To arbitrarily index angle (positioning) ------------------------------------------------------8-2-6
1.2.2 To arbitrarily index angle (cutting) -----------------------------------------------------------8-2-7
2 Machining Program Using Rotary Axis (Index Table)-----------------------------------------------8-2-8
2.1 To Newly Create Machining Data Using Index Table -------------------------------------------8-2-8
2.2 Machining Zero Point of Rotary Axis (Index Table) --------------------------------------------8-2-8
2.3 To Set Index Table Face for Rotary Axis ----------------------------------------------------------8-2-9
2.3.1 Angle --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2-10
2.3.2 Machining zero point -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2-10
2.3.3 Return height between coordinates --------------------------------------------------------- 8-2-11

2019/06/16 3 eCOM3COPRCO
Contents

2.3.4 Return between job processes---------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2-13


2.3.5 Job type “10. Axis travel” of machining data and rotary axis -------------------------- 8-2-14
2.4 Motion Program -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2-15
2.4.1 Rotary axis (index table) motion types ----------------------------------------------------- 8-2-15
2.4.2 To specify cutting by A- or B-axis (index table) in motion program ----------------- 8-2-16
2.5 If A- axis or B-axis Has a Clamping Mechanism ----------------------------------------------- 8-2-17
2.5.1 A- axis or B-axis rotation (servo system off when clamped) --------------------------- 8-2-17
2.5.2 Operation while a rotary axis is unclamped ----------------------------------------------- 8-2-17
2.5.3 Sample program -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2-18

2019/06/16 4 eCOM3COPRCO
Index

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE OF CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM 1

CHAPTER 2 MACHINING DATA 2

CHAPTER 3 SCHEDULE PROGRAM 3

CHAPTER 4 MACHINING SEQUENCE 4

CHAPTER 5 TOOL PATTERNS 5

CHAPTER 6 CUTTING CONDITIONS 6

CHAPTER 7 OPERATION PREPARATION 7

CHAPTER 8 OPTIONS 8

2013/12/18 1 eCOM3COPRIN
Index

(This page was intentionally left blank.)

2013/12/18 2 eCOM3COPRIN
Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

CHAPTER 1

OUTLINE OF CONVERSATIONAL
PROGRAM

1.1 Conversational Program Creation Method


1.2 Outline of Program Types and Programming
1.3 Procedure to Create and Execute Conversational
Program

2017/08/23 1-1 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Program composition

1.1 Conversational Program Creation Method


1.1.1 Outline of conversational program creation
method
A conversational program can operate a machine without the necessity of complexly combining
alphabetical letters and numerical values like a normal program.
1
1.1.2 To switch conversation/NC
When creating a conversation language based program, set the user parameter <Conversation/NC
language change> to <0: Conversation>.

1.1.3 Creation method


1. Push the [EDIT] key to call the <Program edit menu> screen.

2. Select the <Machining data> from the <Program edit menu> screen.

3. The screen automatically asks you a question to create aprogram.


The input request area of the screen asks you a program number as shown belos, so input the
corresponding program number with the value keys.
In addition, program storage places can be changed by moving a folder.
Point the cursor to the folder and push the [ENT] key. Then the program moves into the
selected folder and the list in the folder is indicated.

(Note) Even if you input a folder name and push the [ENT] key, the folder cannot
be moved.

2017/08/23 1-2 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

Input request area

4. Create a program for operetion of themachine.


The teaching data area at the lower part of the screen asks you necessary values and settings.
So respond them and the program is created. Select appropriate factors and input them.

5. After the program has been created, change the following data per program in need.
• If you want to change the sequence of the tools to be used, change the machining order.
• If you want to change the tool types to be used, change the tool patterns.
• If you want to change the cutting conditions, change the cutting conditions.

6. A usable tool is assigned from the tool list of the databank.

2017/08/23 1-3 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Program composition

1.2 Outline of Program Types and Programming


We are going to outlinethe conversational program types and programming.
There are two types of programs used in conversational language as shown in the following table.

Two types of programs


1.(Conversation type) program This is a program created with necessary information
1 Usable number of programs: input on the screen in the required sequence.
The screen indicates “Machining data.”
No.0001-8999
2.Schedule program This is a series of programs selected from multiple
Usable number of programs: necessary programs created in 1 for the use of a
No.9900-9999 continuous operation.

1.2.1 Mutual relationship between program creation and


edit process
Interrelationship between 2 types of program

1. Conversational program

Data bank
(Reference) Material

Input of Stored in
Inquiries machining memory
Necessary
from a data in program is 1. Operation
screen conversational No. 0001
independently
l mode called.
No. 0002
·
·
·

2. Schedule program Necessary


schedule 2. Continuous
program is operation
Necessary program is called and
called.
registered in the order of operation.

2017/08/23 1-4 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

1.2.2 Composition of conversational program and flow of


programming

1
Program edit menu screen

Machining data [1] [ENT]

Movement of folder

Setting of program number

Schddule programs 9900-9999 Machining data 0001-8999

Setting of basic data


・Machining home
・Intra-process return height
・Number of workpieces
・Workpiece material
·
·
Setting of process
・Center hole
・Hole
:
・Subprogram

End of main program


Machining data screen
Setting of subprogram

Preparation for operation [5] [ENT] End of subprogram

Assignment Offset of Offset of Tool


of tool cutting workpiece change
conditions height position

Assignment screen

Bold lines show a normal operation flow.


It is necessary to set the machining order, tool pattern, or cutting condition if it is unnecessary to
reprogram for a dedicated program.

2017/08/23 1-5 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Program composition

1.3 Procedure to Create and Execute


Conversational Program
This section describes the procedure to create a conversational program, prepare for operation, and
execute the program.
Step Outline

1 1. To prepare for Push the [EDIT] key and call the initial screen in the program
creation of program edit mode.
2. To set machining Based on the workpiece drawing, respond the questions from
data the screen.

How
A B many?

Machining
Position? Material? method

3. To set a workpiece Set the machining procedure based on the type and number of
machining order workpieces mounted on the machine table and others.
Creation of program

Same tool used first? Priority workpiece?

4. To set a tool pattern Set a sequence to use the type of tools used in each machining
process.

For M4 tapping?

First Second Then

Center
Drilling Tapping
drilling

2017/08/23 1-6 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

Step Outline
5. To set cutting Push the [EDIT] key and call the initial screen in the program
conditions edit mode.

Creation of program

Big problem!
What is the
peripheral speed to
1
drill a 5-mm
diameter hole in
Tofu (bean curd),
1000 m/min or 0.1
m/min?

6. Preparation for Select necessary tools from the tool data registered beforehand
operation (Assignment and assign them for each process.
of tools)
No. 5 for No. 10 for No. 25 for
center drilling drilling tapping, etc.
Preparation before machining

7. To mount a tool Mount the selected tool in the magazine.


8. Test operation Perform a dry run of the machine without a workpiece on the
table as a test operation.
9. Trial cutting Mount an actual workpiece on the table and perform a trial cut.
Operation

10. Start automatic Perform automatic operation with a completed program.


operation

2017/08/23 1-7 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Program composition

1.3.1 Step 1 (preparation for creating a program)


1. Invalidate the [Data protection] switch.

Program edit menu screen

2. Push the [EDIT] key.


Before inputtinf necessary data for creation of a program, check the content of the data stored
in the databank.
Prior conditions are that the tool list, tool pattern, drilling diameter before tapping, cutting
condition, and parameter data are all correctly set.
If a program is created under the condition of improper data in the databank, no tool can be
assigned, an alarm may occur, or the machine of workpiece may be damaged in cutting. So
utmost care must be paid by you.

* If a newly created or edited program has a machining process to specify a screw type, the
program is created by the file of type specied with a machine parameter <Change screw
type> If parameters are changed after creaton of a program, the program created before
changin the parameters create cannot be edited or operated.

* For creation, correction, or storage of a program and creation of a folder, there are
following capacity limits:
• Total capacity of usable memory is about 128 M Bytes.
• The total number of usable files and folders including NCprograms, conversational
programs, databank, and folders is 4096 files.

2017/08/23 1-8 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

1.3.2 Step 2 (To input machining data)


1. Push [1] and push the [ENT] key.
A new screen is called and you are requested to input a program number.
In addition, if you move the folder, you can change the program storage places.
Point the cursor on the folder and push the [ENT] key, you can go into the selectedfolder so
that the list in the folder can be indicated again.

(Note) Even if you input a folder name and push the [ENT] key, no folder can 1
be moved.

Machining data screen

Program number must be 0001-8999. If other number is input, the following occurs:
• If a program number with a minus like “-1” is input, the <<Has a minus sign>> alarm
appears to prohibit editing.
• If a program number with an alphabetical letter like P100 or a symblo like (10) is input in
a program number, the <<Input data error>> alarm appears to prohibit editing.
• If a number from 9000-9899 is input, the <<Program number error>> alarm appears to
prohibit editing.
• If a number from 9900-9999 is input, it calls the schedule program setting mode. Be
cautious.

You can also select a menu by moving the cursor to the menu number you want to set on the
menu screen and pushing the [ENT] key.

2. Input a program number with [NUMERICAL] keys and push the [ENT] key.
The machining data input screen appears.

3. Input machining data sequencially based on the information from a workpiece drawing.
If the information is indicated in the teaching data area, select an appropriate number from the
teaching data area and set it.

2017/08/23 1-9 eCOM3COPR1.doc


Chapter 1 Program composition

Screen prompting to the operator to specify the X axis machining zero

Screen with the data entered

2017/08/23 1 - 10 eCOM3COPR1.doc
Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

1.3.3 Step 3 (To set workpiece machining order)


The step 3 is to set the machining order for a workpiece to be machined by the tools set according
to the machining data.
You can also select the machining method for a workpiece or multiple workpieces to be machined
on the table by a common tool.

1.Push [2] and push the [ENT] key on the <Program edit menu> screen.
2.Input a desired program number and push the [ENT] key. 1
Machining order screen

1.3.4 Step 4 (To set tool pattern)


On the tool pattern screen, all the tools necessary for a program are set and the order of the tools
used is set.

1. Select [3] from the <Program edit menu> screen and input it and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input the desired program number and push the [ENT] key.

Tool pattern screen

If the tool pattern you consider is the same as the one registered in the databank, you can omit the
Step 4.

2017/08/23 1 - 11 eCOM3COPR1.doc
Chapter 1 Program composition

1.3.5 Step 5 (To set cutting conditions)


• Here, you can set the cutting conditions required fot a tool set in the tool pattern.
(Cutting conditions 1 and 2)
• You can add an auxiliary code to set a tool of the same name and dimensions as a different
tool depending on the differnce of the uses and workpieces. (Cutting conditions 1 and 2)
• You can also set the amounts of air cut, step, override, etc. (Cutting condition 3)
1 1. Select [4] from the <Program edit menu> screen and input it and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input the desired program number and push the [ENT] key.

If the cutting condition you consider is the same as the one registered in the databank, you can
omit the Step 5.

Cutting condition 1 screen

1.3.6 Step 6 (preparation for operation)


Here, you can set the following four:
1. Assignment of tools necessary for an operation
2. Offset of a cutting position after a trial cutting
3. Offset of workpiece height
4. Tool change position

1. Select [5] from the <Program edit menu> screen and input it and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input the desired program number and push the [ENT] key.

Operation preparation menu screen

2017/08/23 1 - 12 eCOM3COPR1.doc
Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

3. When the input of new machining data is completed, select [1] from the <operation
preparation menu> nd push the [ENT] key.

Tool assignment screen

4. Push [F7] (tool assignment) key.


An appropriate tool is automatically selected from the tool list registered in the databank
referring to the contents (machining data, tool pattern, cutting conditions, etc.) of the program
data already set.
If the necessary tool is not registered in the tool list of the databank, the <<Required tool not
found>> alarm appears.

Tool assignment completion screen

2017/08/23 1 - 13 eCOM3COPR1.doc
Chapter 1 Program composition

1.3.7 Step 7 (To mount tools)


1. Push the [MDI] key.
2. Push the [ATC TOOL] key.

Screen asking you a program number

3. Enter the program number to be used in memory operation and push the [ENT].
The tool number and tool name assigned in the Step 6 are indicated at the lower part of the
screen.

Screen on which the tools are input into the magazine number

4. Move the cursor to a vacant magazine number and input the tool list number used in the
program.
5. The tool is correctly mounted in the set magazine position.

The lower part of the screen merely indicates the necessary tools sequencially but does not
mean that the magazine number is set on the screen.
The tools used before in a previous program may be indicated and the current tools in the
magazine may not be usde.
During a program being performed, tools are merely changed based on the tool numbers set in
the magazine.
Note that an incorrect tool set in the magazine will fail in the performance of the program
causisng a serious problem on the workpiece or machine. Mount a correct tool in the correct
magazine position withot fail.

2017/08/23 1 - 14 eCOM3COPR1.doc
Chapter 1 Outline of conversational program

1.3.8 Step 8 (test operation)


1. Push the [MEM ] key to call the memory operation mode.
2. Input the required program number and push the [ENT] key.
3. Push the [DRY] key and the [SINGL] key.
4. Push the [START] switch and confirm that all set machining data work correctly at each
operation.

Memory operation screen 1

Check that the lamp of each key is lighting.


Check the setting value of the user parameter <Dry run offset amount>
The dry run operation can be safely done as a test operation at the position higher than the
actual motion of the Z axi by the value set by the user parameter <Dry run offset amount>

In addition, the single operation stops each operation one by one, so each motion can be easily
checked.
After the performance of these operations, proceed to Step 9 “Trial cutting” and then to Step
10 “Automatic operation.”

2017/08/23 1 - 15 eCOM3COPR1.doc
Chapter 1 Program composition

(This page was intentionally left blank.)

2017/08/23 1 - 16 eCOM3COPR1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2
CHAPTER 2

MACHINING DATA

2.1 Machining Data (Basic)


2.2 To Set Drilling System Job
2.3 To Set Milling System Job
2.4 To Set Non-cutting System Job
2.5 Motion Calls
2.6 Finish Operation and Subprograms
2.7 To Re-edit Machining Data

2017/08/23 2- 1 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.1 Machining Data (Basic)


2.1.1 What is machining data?
Machining data is a program that sets a basic condition like workpiece zero, machining process,
machining position, machining shape, etc. which comprise the program .

The following is a machining data input table.

Machining data input table


Classification No. Title Contents
Basic data Workpiece zero Basic data is input to create a
2 Return height (job change) program.
(height)
Tool change return (height) (*1)
Workpieces
Workpiece material
Job Cutting 1 Center hole Basic information, machining
setting 2 Hole pattern, etc. necessary for
3 Tap machining are input.
4 Ream
5 Counter boring hole
6 Counter boring tap
7 Counter boring reamer
8 Milling
12 Sub program
15 Rolled tap
16 Counter boring rolled tap
17 Motion call Machining data is completed by
specifying each motion like a
G-code program and setting
coordinate values, feedrate,
rotational frequency, etc.
18 Facing Basic information, machining
19 Pocket milling pattern, etc. necessary for each
20 Contouring machining are input.
21 Chamfering
Non-cu 9 Coolant Job necessary for creating a
tting 10 Axis travel program in a non-cutting area are
11 Signal output input.
13 Program stop
14 Coordinate system setting

(*1) This item is effective for a machine model where a magazine motes synchronously with the
Z-axis travel. Other machine models are not indicated.

2017/08/23 2- 2 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.1.2 Setting the Machining data


This section explains the procedure to prepare machining data.

2.1.2.1 Procedure to prepare machining data


1. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.
2. Push the [EDIT] key to call the program edit mode.
If the lamp of the [PRGRM] key on the operation panel is not on, push the [PRGRM] key.
The program edit menu screen appears.
When editing machining data, invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch without fail.

Program edit menu screen 2

3. Push [1] and push the [ENT] key.


On the edit menu screen, you can also select a menu item by moving the cursor key to a
desired menu number and pushing the [ENT] key.

4. A machining data list appears.


The program number selected from the screen changes as follows according to the setting of
the user parameter <Set same number to edit/memory operation programs>:
<0:No>: Program number edited last time
<1:Yes>: Program number operated before editing
In addition, by moving the folder, the program storage place can be changed.
Point the cursor to the folder and push the [ENT] key. Then the program moves into the
selected folder and the list in the folder is indicated.

(Note) Even if you input a folder name and push the [ENT] key, the folder
cannot be moved.

2017/08/23 2- 3 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

5. Select the program number to edit.


The program selected by the cursor key or the PAGE key is changed.
If you want to edit the program of the number selected, push only the [ENT] key.
Or input a desired program number and push the [ENT] key.

Here, input the program number 1000.


The following machining data edit screen appears.

2 Program indication
area (Data
indication area)

Input reques area

Teaching data area

2.1.2.2 Keys used for setting machining data


To set machining data, use the following keys.

Keys used for setting machining data

2017/08/23 2- 4 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

1. [ENT] key
This is the key to input the data of the input request area into the program indication area.
By pushing this [ENT] key, the data is established.
This is also used for inputting new data and changing data.

Ex)
i) To input a program number, input [1000] and push the [ENT] key.

ii) To change the input request area 123.456 to 123.466 using the cursor,

(1) Push the [←CURSOR] and input 123.456 . 2


(2) Input [6]. Then it changes to 123.466 .

(3) Push the [→CURSOR] to change to 123.466 .

(4) Push the [ENT] key to establish 123.466 .

Note that the data that becomes valid by pushing the [ENT] key is always the position
before the cursor.

Ex)
123.456

If the cursor is at this place like above and the [ENT] key is pushed, the data becomes
123.4
For the procedure of editing Search, Insertion, Deletion, Copy, Backspace, etc., refer to
“To Re-edit Machining Data.”

2. [CAN] key.
This is the key to cancel the data in the input area.
Ex)
123.456 Push the [CAN] key.

The data is cleared.

3. [BACKSPACE] key
Ex)
123.456
Push the [BACKSPACE] key.

123.45 The data of one letter before the cursor is cleared.

(Note 1) The [DEL] key cannot delete the input data. If the [DEL] key is pushed
in the input area, the <<Deletion position error>> alarm appears.
(Note 2) The [INS] key cannot insert any input data. If the [INS] key is pushed
in the input area, the <<Insertion position error>> alarm appears.

2017/08/23 2- 5 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.1.3 Setting the Workpiece zero


This section describes the workpiece zero setting procedure.

2.1.3.1 Normal setting method


When machining data is set, the screen requests you to set the workpiece zero.
1. Input a value for X, Y, Z, A, and B sequentially and push the [ENT] key each time when the
value is input.
Set “?” if the A- or B-axis is not used.

If the data is not sequentially input and you attempt to move to the next item by the
2 [→CURSOR] key, the <<Cursor movement position error>> alarm appears and the cursor
does not move

The workpiece zero of the X or Y axis is the position from the machine zero.
The workpiece zero of the Z axis is the position from the table top.

Ex) If the workpiece zero is (X: -70.000, Y: -40.000, Z: 100.000)

Coordinate system of workpiece zero


Machine zero
(position of
the spindle
center when
the table is at
its zero point)

Workpiece
zero

Fixture

Table

2017/08/23 2- 6 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.1.3.2 To use [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key


If the workpiece zero of the X, Y, Z, A, or B axis is set due to the change of the program, fixture
mounting position, or the like, the current X, Y, Z, A, or B machine coordinate value can be set as
the workpiece zero.

For X ,Y <Set workpiece zero>


1. Move the X and Y axes to the newly setting workpiece zero in the manual operation mode.
2. Push the [EDIT] key to call the program edit mode.
3. Push [1] on the program edit menu screen and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input the desired program number you want to set for the new machining coordinate.
5. Confirm that the cursor is blinking at the workpiece zero <X> or <Y> on the machining data 2
screen and push the [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key.
6. Confirm the value of <Workpiece zero after setting> on the screen. Select the desired item
from the following:
[F0] (Set XY axes) key : Push this key to set the X/Y axis.
[F1] (Not set) key : Push this key if the X/Y axis is not changed.
[F3] (Set X axis) key : Push this key only when the X-axis is set.
[F4] (Set Y axis) key : Push this key only when the Y-axis is set.

2017/08/23 2- 7 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

For Z <Set workpiece zero>


1. Move the Z-axis to the newly setting workpiece zero in the manual operation mode.
2. Push the [EDIT] key to call the program edit mode.
3. Push [1] on the program edit menu screen and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input the desired program number you want to set for the newly machining coordinate.
5. Move the cursor to “Z” and push the [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key.
6. If you want to confirm and set the value of <Workpiece zero after setting> on the screen, push
the [F0] (Set) key. If not, push the [F1] (Not set) key.

For A <Set workpiece zero> (when one axis is used)


1. Move the A-axis to the newly setting workpiece zero in the manual operation mode.
2. Push the [EDIT] key to call the program edit mode.
3. Push [1] on the program edit menu screen and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input the desired program number you want to set for the newly machining coordinate.
5. Move the cursor to “A” and push the [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key.
6. If you want to confirm and set the value of <Workpiece zero after setting> on the screen, push
the [F0] (Set) key. If not, push the [F1] (Not set) key.

2017/08/23 2- 8 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

For A <Set workpiece zero> (when two axes A1 and A2 are used)
1. Move the A1 and A2 axes to the newly setting workpiece zero point in the manual operation
mode.
2-5. Carry out the same operation as in for A <Set workpiece zero> (when one axis is used).
6. Confirm the value of <Workpiece zero after setting> on the screen. When the A1 axis is set,
push the [F0] (Set A1 axis) key. When the A2 axis is set, push the [F1] (Set A2 axis) key. If
none of the axis is set, push the [F2] (Not set) key.

(Note 1) If there is no additional axis option, the <<No A (B)-axis option>>


alarm appears when the [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key is pushed. The
screen does not become the <Set workpiece zero> screen.

For B <Set workpiece zero> (when one axis is used)


1. Move the B-axis to the newly setting workpiece zero point in the manual operation mode.
2. Push the [EDIT] key to call the program edit mode.
3. Push [1] on the program edit menu screen and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input the desired program number you want to set for the newly machining coordinate.
5. Move the cursor to “B” and push the [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key.
6. If you want to confirm and set the value of <Workpiece zero after setting> on the screen, push
the [F0] (Set) key. If not, push the [F1] (Not set) key.

2017/08/23 2- 9 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

For B <Set workpiece zero> (when two axes B1 and B2 are used)
1. Move the B1 and B2 axes to the newly setting workpiece zero point in the manual operation
mode.
2-5. Carry out the same operation as in for B <Set workpiece zero> (when one axis is used).
6. Confirm the value of <Workpiece zero after setting> on the screen. When the B1 axis is set,
push the [F0] (Set B1 axis) key. When the B2 axis is set, push the [F1] (Set B2 axis) key. If
none of the axis is set, push the [F2] (Not set) key.

2.1.4 Setting the Return height


This section explains the procedure to set a return height of the Z-axis when moving to the next
job or workpiece.
1. Input a value to <Return height (job change) > and push the [ENT] key.

2017/08/23 2- 10 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Return height after job change

Specify the height from the Z axis workpiece zero point by the setting value.
Example) Return height after job change 150.000

Return height
after job change
150 2
Z-axis
Fixture workpiece zero
120

Input a value for <Tool change return> and push the [ENT] key.
(This item is effective to a machine model where the magazine moves synchronously with the
Z-axis.)

Tool change return height

Specify the height from the Z axis workpiece zero point by the setting value.
Example) Tool change return height 150.000

Tool change
return height
150

Z-axis
workpiece zero
Fixture
120

If ? is set, tools are changed at the Z-axis machine zero position.

In actual return, the tip of the tool that is the longest of the tool mounted in the spindle and the
tool changed is returned up by the amount of pulling out the tool from the tool change position
height.

2017/08/23 2- 11 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.1.5 Setting the Workpieces


This section explains the procedure to decide the workpieces set on the table.
1. Input the<Workpieces> (number of workpieces to be machined) and push the [ENT] key.
Up to 99 workpieces can be set.
If 100 or more workpieces are set, the <<Too many digits>> alarm appears.

Setting the machining coordinate system for multiple workpieces

When multiple workpieces are set, it is necessary to input the workpiece positions
“X, Y” from the reference workpiece positions for the multiple workpieces.
Example)
-100
Reference
position Reference position
(X,Y)

Workpiece zero

X
Workpiece 2 (reference workpiece) Workpiece 1 (reference workpiece)

With respect to the above Fig., it is unnecessary to input the coordinates in a program because
the workpiece 1 has already been at the workpiece zero point.
The workpiece 2 becomes (X -100.000, Y 0.000).

2017/08/23 2- 12 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.1.6 Setting the Workpiece material


This section explains the procedure to set a workpiece material.
1. Select the workpiece material from the materials listed in the teaching data area, input the
number, and push the [ENT] key.

Standard cutting conditions (peripheral speed and feed) for respective workpiece materials
have been registered in the databank.

Customers are requested to set appropriate cutting condition values for the special materials
other than the workpiece materials 1-5 in the databank.

2017/08/23 2- 13 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.1.7 Setting the Job


This section explains the procedure to set a job.

(1) Select a necessary job from the jobs in the teaching data area, input the number, and push the
[ENT] key. The maximum number of registerable jobs is 99.

Twenty-one kinds of job names appear in the teaching area.

When a job set like the above screen, the LED of the [INS] key goes on.

Here, if a job is not set but the cursor is moved by the [CURSOR] keys other than for a job
like setting a workpiece material, the <<Cursor movement position error>> alarm appears.
If you want to reedit basic data, use one of the following two methods:
• To push the [INS] key again for canceling a job input (the current job is discarded.)
• To edit after all jobs have been input

When creating a new program, it is possible to continuously input a job while the LED of the
[INS] key is being on after one job creation finishes. When the job input finishes, the LED
goes off.

When editing a program again, the LED of the [INS] key goes off after one job creation
finishes.

2017/08/23 2- 14 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.2 Setting the Drilling Job


This section explains the procedure to set holing jobs of the following 9 kinds:
1.Center hole drilling, 2. Drilling, 3. Tapping, 4. Reaming, 5. Counterbore drilling, 6. Counterbore
tapping, 7. Counterbore reaming, 8. Rolled tapping 9. Counterbore rolled tapping

2.2.1 Center hole drilling


Center hole drilling is an operation which makes a positioning hole for drilling.

• Example during data input


2

1. In order to respond to the question from the input request area on the screen, respond an
answer according to the teaching in the teaching data area, push the [1] key, and push the
[ENT] key. Setting items appear one by one from the top as shown in the above screen.
2. Input values to <Center diameter> (D) and <Angle> (θ) and push the [ENT] key whenever
each value is input.

Shape of center hole drilling


Center diameter(D):
Diameter of drilled hole
Angle(θ): Point angle of drilled hole

2017/08/23 2- 15 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

3. Select the necessary pattern from the patterns in the teaching data area, input the number, and
push the [ENT] key.

For the patterns, refer to the after-mentioned pattern table.

4. Input values to <Height> and <Return height> of the <Z-axis position> and push the [ENT]
key each time when the value is input.
<Height>: The height from the Z-axis workpiece zero position to the workpiece top
<Return height>: The return height (distance from a machining position to a next
machining position) of the Z-axis (tool tip) from the Z-axis workpiece zero in a job

The contents of data that the screen asks differ depending on the kind of pattern. Refer to the
pattern table.

Z-axis height and return

Return Depth
Height
height

Z axis workpiece zero

When a center hole drilling, the <Bottom of hole> and <Depth> of the <Z-axis position> are
ignored, an asterisk (∗) is indicated on the screen, and the cursor skips the asterisked item.

5. Input a value to <X> and <Y> in the <XY-axes position> and push the [ENT] key each time
when the value is input.
The machining start position is determined by the X and Y coordinates from the workpiece
zero.
This figure (Z-axis height and return) shows the machining start position as follows:
X: -50.000
Y: -80.000

2017/08/23 2- 16 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

X and Y start positions

-50
Workpiece zero
-X

-80

Machining
start position 2
(X and Y positions)
Workpiece
-Y

X and Y start positions (circumference pattern)

The X and Y positions of the circumference pattern is the center of circle.


Note that it is different from the machining start position.
Example) X and Y positions: X: -100.000, Y: -80.000

-100 Workpiece

Machining
start positon -8 0

X and Y
Workpiece positions

6. Input the <Peripheral speed> and <Feed> by the percentage and push the [ENT] key each
time when the value is input.

The <XY-axes position> of the circumference pattern differ from the machining start position.
With respect to the setting of the <XY-axes position>, this method goes the same for other
hole system jobs (hole, tap, rolled tap, ream, Counter boring hole, Counter boring tap, Counter
boring rolled tap, and Counter boring reamer).
The <Peripheral speed> and <Feed> are 100 % if no value is input and the [ENT] key is
pushed.
The percentages of the <Peripheral speed> and <Feed> set here are effective to all the tools
used in the job.
The peripheral speed and feed registered for cutting conditions in the databank are defined as
100 %.

2017/08/23 2- 17 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.2.2 Drilling
1. In order to respond to the questions in the input request area, push [2] according to the
teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input values to <Hole diameter> (D) and <Chamfer> (C) and push the [ENT] key every time
when the value is input. If chamfering is unnecessary set [0].
3. Select the <Pattern> from the teaching data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.
4. Select the shape of the <Bottom of hole> of the <Z-axis position> from the teaching data area,
input the number, and push the [ENT] key.
5. Input a value to <Depth> (L) of the Z-axis machining position and push the [ENT] key.

2 Refer to the pattern table.


For a through hole, input the workpiece thickness in the “Depth”.
The setting procedure for other items is the same as for the center hole drilling.

Shape of drilling

Blind hole drilling D


C

D :Hole diameter
C :Chamfer
L :Depth
Through-hole drilling D
C

• For effective machining of deep holes, drill step motions can be selected from cutting
conditions and drill step return amounts (drill step method, drill step ratio, and drill step
return position) in the databank.

2017/08/23 2- 18 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.2.3 Tapping
1. Push [3] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select the “Torsion direction” of the screw thred from the teaching data area, input it, and
push the [ENT] key.
<1. Right-handed screw>
<2. Left-handed screw>
3. Select the thread type from the teaching data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.

• When the machine parameter <Change screw type> is <0: Language set> and the
<Display language> is <0: Japanese> or the <Change screw type> is <1: For Japan>, the
following is indicated 2
Thread type Symbol
<1. Metric coarse thread> M
<2. Metric fine pitch thread> m
<3. Unified coarse thread> UNC
<4. Unified fine pitch thread> UNF
<5. Sewing machine thread> SM
<6. Pipe thread PS> PS
<7. Pipe thread PT> PT
<8. Pipe thread PF> PF
<9. Miniature screw> S

• When the machine parameter <Change screw type> is <0:Language set> and the <Display
language> is other than < 0:Japanese> or the <Change screw type> is < 2:For other than
Japan>, the following is indicated .

Thread type Symbol


<1.Metric coarse thread> M
<2.Metric fine pitch thread> m
<3.Unified coarse thread> UNC
<4.Unified fine pitch thread> UNF
<5.NPS> NPS
<6.BSP> BSP
<7.BSW> BSW
<8.BSF> BSF
<9.BA> BA
<10.NPT> NPT
<11.Sewing machine thread> SM
<12.Miniature screw thread> S

(Note 1) As for the thread type, use the screw set for creating the program.
Even if the parameter is changed after the program has been created,
the thread type is not changed.
If you attempt to change the parameter of a program specified with
the thread type other than <1. Metric coarse thread>, <2. Metric fine
pitch thread>, <3. Unified coarse thread>, or <4. Unified fine pitch
thread> or you attempt to input the thread type from other machine
parameter, the operator message <<The kind of screw differs.>>
appears to disable you to edit. In addition, if an operation is tried to
carry out, the <<Error of the kind of screw thread>> alarm appears to
disable you to operate.

(Note 2) If you attempt to edit a conversational program of a thread type


specified with <10. NPT>, <11. Sewing machine thread>, or <12.
Miniature screw thread> for A00 or B00, the parameter <Change screw
type> is <0;Language set> and the <Display language> is
<0;Japanese>, or if you input the thread type to a machine whose
<Change screw type> is <1;For Japan>, the operator message <<The
kind of screw differs.>> appears to disable you to edit. In addition,
tool assignment becomes unavailable to disable you to operate the
machine

2017/08/23 2- 19 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Shape of tapping

D
C

L L1

2
D
C

D: Nominal diameter
C: Chamfer
L
L: Tap depth
L1: Drilling depth

4. Input the “Nominal diameter” (D) of screw, pitch or the number of threads and push the
[ENT] key each time when the value is input.
5. Input a value to the <Drilling depth> (L 1 ) and push the [ENT] key.

If a thread type, nominal diameter, or pitch or the number of threads is set for the depth of a tap
lower hole, the drilling diameter of a tap lower hole registered in the databank is automatically
decided.
Normally, the <Drilling depth> value is set to [15.000], but the value can also be set to [0] for
drilling through. Note, when tapping through-hole 2 in the diagram on the next page, use the
following settings.
Drilling depth: 15.000
Depth: 10.000
For a blind hole, set the Drilling depth L 1 .

For a metric screw, specify the pitch.


For an inch screw, specify the number of threads.

Indication of a screw
M 5.000 × 0.800
↓ ↓ ↓
Metric Nominal diameter Pitch
Coarse screw

2017/08/23 2- 20 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Though-hole drilling

Through-hole 2
10 15
Drilling depth: 15.000
Depth: 10.000

2
Through-hole 1
15 Input [15.000] or [0]
for drilling depth

6. Input a value to <Chamfer> (C) and push the [ENT] key.


If chamfering is unnecessary, input [0].

The procedure for other setting items is the same as for drilling.

Blind hole

L L1 L : Tap depth
L1: Drilling depth

• Tap step
For effective tapping, select the step motion from the cutting conditions 3(tap step method, tap
step ratio, and tapping return speed) in the databank.
In addition, the return position can be selected by the user parameter 1 (switch1) (Tap step
return position) in the databank.
In addition, the return position can be selected by the user parameter <Tap step return
position>.

2017/08/23 2- 21 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.2.4 Reaming
1. Push [4] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input a value to <Hole diameter> (D) and push the [ENT] key.

When D (Reaming hole diameter) is input, the lower hole drilling diameter is automatically set
by the value set for the reamer finish margin 1/2 in the cutting condition 3.

Reaming

Blind hole
2

D: Nominal diameter
C: Chamfer
Throgh-hole L: Reamer depth
L1: Drilling depth

3. Input a value to <Drilling depth> and push the [ENT] key.

Normally, [15.000] is set for value of <Drilling depth> but [0] can also be set for a though-hole
drilling.
Note, when reaming through-hole 2 in the following diagram, use the following settings.
Drilling depth: 15.000
Depth: 10.000
For a blind hole, set the Drilling depth L 1 .

Though-hole drilling

Thouth-hole 2

10 15 Drilling depth: 15.000


Depth: 10.000

Thouth-hole 1

15 Enter [15.000] or
[0] for drilling depth

2017/08/23 2- 22 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

4. Input a value to <Chamfer> (C) and push the [ENT] key.


If chamfering is unnecessary, set [0].

The procedure for other setting items is the same as for holing.

Blind hole
D

L: Reamer depth
2
L L1
L1: Drilling depth

• Cutting conditions and parameters for reaming


Conditions for reaming are set in the cutting condition 3 (Reamer finish margin) and
(Reamer return speed) in the databank.

2.2.5 Counterbore drilling


1. Push [5] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input values to <Hole diameter> (d), <Counter boring dia.> (D), <Counterbore depth> (L1),
and <Chamfer> (C) and push the [ENT] key each time when the value is input.

The procedure for other setting items is the same as for holing.

Shape of Counterbore drilling

Blind hole
D
L1 C

L
d

d : Hole diameter
D : Counter boring dig
Though-hole D C : Chamfer
L1 C L : Machining hole depth
L1 : Counter boring depth

L
d

2017/08/23 2- 23 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.2.6 Counterbore tapping


1. Push [6] according to teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select the “Torsion direction” of a screw from the teaching data area, input it, and push the
[ENT] key.
<1. Right thread>
<2. Left thread>
3. Select the “Type” of thread from the teaching data area, input it, and push the [ENT] key.

Items of the thread type are the same as for tapping.

2 Shape of counterbore tapping

Blind hole
D
C

L2
L L1
d

d: Nominal diameter of screw


Trough-hole D: Counter bore diameter
D
C C: Chamfering
L2: Counter bore depth
L: Tap depth
L2 L1: Drilling depth
L
d

4. Input values to Nominal diameter (d) and pitch or the number of threads of the screw and push
the [ENT] key each time when the value is input.
Metric screw: Input a pitch.
Inch screw: Input the number of threads.
5. Input values of <Counter boring dia.>, <Counter boring depth>, and <Drilling depth> and
push the [ENT] key each time when the value is input.

Setting tapping type


D
9.500
C

L2
5.400 L
10.000 D: Counter boring diameter
C: Chamfer
M 5.000 L2: Counter boring depth
P 0.800 L: Tap depth

2017/08/23 2- 24 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

If a thread type, nominal diameter, or pitch or the number of threads is set for
the tapping drill diameter, the tapping drill diameter registered in the
databank is automatically decided.
The value of <Drilling depth> is set with the normal value [15.000], however,[0] can be set for
a though-hole.
Note, when counterbore tapping through-hole 2 in the next diagram, use the following settings.
Drilling depth: 15.000
Depth: 10.000
For a blind hole, set the Drilling depthL1.
2
Though-hole

Through-hole 2
10 15
Drilling depth: 15.000
Depth: 10.000

Through-hole 1
Input [15.000] or [0]
to the drilling depth.

6. Input a value to <Chamfer> (C) and push the [ENT] key.


If chamfering is unnecessary, set [0].

The procedure for other setting items is the same as for holing.

Blind hole
D
C

L2 L: Reamer depth
L L1 L1: Drilling depth
d

2017/08/23 2- 25 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.2.7 Counterbore reaming


1. Push [7] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input a value to <Hole diameter> (d) and push the [ENT] key.
When a value is input to the reaming hole diameter d, the lower hole drilling diameter is
automatically set according to the setting value of the reamer finish margin 1/2 in the cutting
condition 3.

3. Input values to <Counter boring dia.> (D) and <Counter boring depth> (L2) and push the
[ENT] key each time when the value is input.

2 Shape of counterbore reaming

Blind hole D
C

L2
d L L1

Through-hole D d: Hole diameter


C
D: Counter boring diameter
C: Chamfer
L2 L2: Counter boring depth
L: Reamer depth
L L1: Drilling depth
d

4. Input a value to the <Drilling depth> and push the [ENT] key.
You can set [0] for a though-hole.
Note, when counter bore reaming through-hole 2 in the following diagram, input the following
settings.
Drilling depth : 15.000
Depth : 10.000
For a blind hole, input a value of Drilling depth L 1 .

Though-hole

Through-hole 2

10 15 Drilling depth: 15.000


Depth: 10.000

Through-hole 1
Input [15.000] or [0]
to the drilling depth.

2017/08/23 2- 26 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

5. Input a value to <Chamfer> (C) and push the [ENT] key.


If chamfering is unnecessary, set [0].

The procedure for other setting items is the same as for holing.

Blind hole

D
C
d : Hole diameter
L2
L
D: Counter boring diameter 2
d L1 C: Chamfer

L: Ream depth
L1: Drilling depth
L2: Counter boring depth

2.2.8 Rolled tapping


Push [1] and [5] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
The procedure for setting other items is the same as for tapping.

2.2.9 Counterbore rolled tapping


Push [1] and [6] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
The procedure for setting other items is the same as for counterbore tapping.

2017/08/23 2- 27 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.2.10 Pattern list


The pattern here we explain is a pattern to decide a procedure for performing a same machining
operation at several places on one workpiece. This pattern can be used not only to hole machining
but also to milling.
Classification Pattern Input contents
<Divisions>
<1. Circle>
Set how many the circle is
pattern
divided for machining.

<Holes>
2 Set the number of holes to be
machined.

<Start angle>
Set the CCW angle of a
machining start position against
the X-axis on an X-Y plane.

<Radius>
Set the radius of the circle
Machining order of circle pattern pattern.
(Ex)
Machining order
(CCW from machining start position) Machining direction of the
circle pattern is CCW.
B A Machining However, if the machining
start position order is per job, the even
number tools turn in CW
direction.
60° Start Y
60° 60°
angle Refer to the machining order.
C When tapping is done first in
X&Y r hole machining (drilling) and
coordinates 50.000 then tapping (P tap), the hole
X
machining is done in CCW and
tapping is done in CW.

Divisions: 6.000
Holes: 3
Start angle: 60.000
Machining start position: A
Radius: 50.000
Machining order in drilling

Machining
B start position

60° Start
angle
60° 60° Y
r
50.000
Machining X
order in
tapping

2017/08/23 2- 28 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Classification pattern Input contents


<X> <Y>
<2. Square>
Set a pitch of the square pattern
pattern
in the X and Y directions.

X
Y 2
X

The top point on the square (square or rectangle) is the


machining hole position.
Machine four holes.
When a pitch is set, the machining direction changes
according to a symbol.

Machining start position and machining direction


Machining start Machining start
position position
(X/Y position) (X/Y position)
1 1

1 X -150. 2 X 150.
2 2
Y -120. Y -120.

3 3
3 3

3 X 150. 4 X -150.
2 2
Y 120. Y 120.

1 1

Machining start Machining start


position position
(X/Y position) (X/Y position)

2017/08/23 2- 29 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Classification Pattern Input contents


<Holes>
<3. Line>
Set the number of holes to be
pattern
machined.

<Start angle>
Set the angle of a machining
start position as its center
against the X-axis in the
machining direction (pitch
2 direction) on an X-Y plane.

<Pitch>
Set the distance pitch of holes
on a line pattern. This distance
pitch must be equal.
Example of line pattern

Start angle 225°

X axis
180° 0°

Pitch Machining
15 start position
(X/Y position)
Pitch
15

270°
Machining order
(Start angle direction from machining start position)
Holes: 3
Start angle: 225°
Pitch: 15.000
Only one hole set at the X and
<4. Point>
Y position is machined.
pattern

2017/08/23 2- 30 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Classification Pattern Input contents


<Angle>
<5. Grid >
Set a CCW angle of a grid
pattern machining group against the
X-axis as the X and Y
position being the center.
Example of setting an
“Angle”

2
Y
X
45°

<Pitch> X
Example of grid pattern <Pitch> Y
Angle: 0° Set the pitch between holes
11 12 13 14 15
under the condition of an
Y angle grid shape returned to
10 9 8 7 6
0°.
Example of setting “Pitch X”
1 2 3 4 5 X and “Pitch Y”
Machining start
(X and Y position) Machining order position
15 6 5 Pitch X Pitch Y
10 15

14 7 4
Y
Angle: 90°
13 8 3 45° X
12 9 2
Pitch X: 10.000
11 10 1 Pitch Y: 15.000

Angle: 180° <Holes> X


<Holes> Y
Set the number of holes
machined in a grid shape
5 4 3 2 1
returned to 0°.
Example of setting “Holes X”
6 7 8 9 10
and “Holes Y”
15 14 13 12 11

Y
Angle: 270°
45° X

Holes X: 4
1 10 11 Holes Y: 3

2 9 12

3 8 13

4 7 14

5 6 15

2017/08/23 2- 31 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Classification Pattern Input contents


<Holes>
<6. Line XY>
Set the number of machining
pattern holes.
<Pitch> X
<Pitch> Y
Pitch X: 15.000
Pitch Y: 5.000

Example of setting a “Pitch”


Y
2 5
5
X
15 15

This is a pattern to perform machining at the points in the


distance pitches X and Y set on a line.
The machining order is that the point specified at X and Y
position is first machined. Then, machining is done in the pitch
direction by the number of operations.
Machining start position and machining directions

3
2
1 Machining start position (X and Y position)

<Holes>
<7.Point
Set the number of machining
random>
holes.
pattern
The maximum number of
operations settable is 12.
“X” “Y” after No. 2
Set the machining hole
positions incremental from the
X and Y position.

Example of setting “X” and


“Y”
No. 2

No. 1 15.000
Random hole position group is machined from the X and Y
machining hole.
Machining start position and machining directions -25.000
No. 3
2

Y 15.000

20.000
X
1 No. 2 hole
Machining start position 3 X: 20.000
(X and Y position) Y: 15.000

The hole position machined first is the position specified by the No. 3 hole
X and Y position. X: 15.000
Y: -25.000

2017/08/23 2- 32 eCOM3COPR2-1.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.3 Setting Milling System Job


The setting procedure is provided for the following 5 types of milling jobs.
1. Milling 2. Facing 3. Pocket milling 4. Contouring 5. Chamfering.

2.3.1 Milling
1. Push [8] according o the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input a value to <Tool diameter> and push the [ENT] key.

Plus specified : Line


Minus specified : R cutting
If a plus is not added (or no symbol is added) when a tool diameter is set, it becomes line
2
cutting. If a minus (symbol [-]) is added, it becomes R cutting.
The screen asks you to input necessary items respectively.

1. Line cutting
(1) Input a value to <Tool diameter> and push the [ENT] key.

This is line cutting, so it is unnecessary to input a symbol.


Ex) For φ10, set 10.000.

(2) Input a value to <Cutting length X> and <Cutting length Y> and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the cutting length (1)

Specify the Incremental travel amount.


Example)
The cutting length in milling in the arrow direction is as follows:
X: -80.000
Y: 60.000

- 80 - 20
Cutting length X
Tool diameter X Workpiece zero

-80
60

Y axis

Y Machining start
position (X and Y
X position)
X: -20.000
Y: -80.000

2017/08/23 2- 33 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Setting the cutting length (2)

Cutting length
with allowance

Tool Tool

2 Workpiece
width

Allowance Allowance

(3) Select a necessary mode from 1. Cutting mode and 2. Position check mode in the teaching
data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.

If the cutting length is set only as the workpiece width in milling of the hatched part,
machining at the workpiece end may not be enough.
It is necessary to set the cutting length a little longer than the workpiece width as shown
below.

Cutting mode and Position check mode

1. When the cutting mode is selected, the corner part may be rounded in
continuous cutting. The faster the cutting speed is or the bigger cutting time
constant is, the bigger the roundness becomes.

2. When the position check mode is selected, the feedrate goes down to 0 toward
the X/Y travel end part. Then, the motion goes to the next when the motion is
confirmed that it is in an imposition (which means the position is in the finish
position).

Ex Process 2

Process 1

1. Cutting mode 2. Position check mode

The tool passes


Programmed command exactly here.

Tool path in actual motion

2017/08/23 2- 34 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Ex) When the X/Y cutting travel goes to the Z-axis cutting travel, the job 2 works like
the Z-axis cutting travel as shown below.
Even if “1. Cutting mode” is selected, the position check mode performs cutting in
the Z-axis direction and goes to the next job 03 (X/Y cutting).

Cutting mode at Z-axis position

Cutting mode

Job 03
Job 04
2

Job 01

Job 02
The Z-axis moves in the position check mode.
After the Z-axis cutting finishes, the X- and Y-axes are cut
in the jobs 03 and 04 in the cutting mode.

The cutting mode at the Z-axis position is effective only when the X and Y cutting jobs
(milling) are done in continuous operation.

Return position (Example)

If the return position ≥ (Workpiece height - depth), the tool tip returns to the
return position. If the return position ≤ (Workpiece height - depth), the tool
tip does not return to the return position.

Return position (Example)


Return position
Tool
Workpiece top
Depth
Return 2
120
height Workpiece height
100
0

Z-axis workpiece zero

(4) Input a value to “Depth” and push the [ENT] key.


The “Depth” means the cutting machining depth.

(5) Input a value to “Height” and push the [ENT] key.


The “Height” means the height from the Z-axis workpiece zero to the workpiece top.

(6) Input a value to “Return” and push the [ENT] key.


The “Return” means the return height from the Z-axis workpiece zero to the tool tip.

2017/08/23 2- 35 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(7) Input a value to “X and Y position” and push the [ENT] key.
Setting the X/Y position (Example)

Set the coordinate values calculated from the Workpiece


zero point to the machining start position.
Example)
X: -20.000 - 80 - 20
Y: -80.000 Workpiece
zero point

2
- 60
- 60

Machining start point

Setting for “Peripheral speed” is the same as for center hole machining.

2. R cutting
(1) Input a value to “Tool dia.” and push the [ENT] key.

As this is R cutting, add the minus (-) symbol.


If it is φ10, set like -10.000.

(2) Input a value to “R start point” and push the [ENT] key.
Setting the an R start point and an R end point

Set the coordinate values “R start point” and “R end point” calculated from
the center of R in the incremental method.
Coordinates from the
center Workpiece zero
point off the X and Y Workpiece zero
positions R
-150

35 - 80

35

R start point (machining start position)


Coordinates (X: 35.000, Y: 0.000) from
the center of R
R end point (machining end position)
Coordinates (X: 0.000, Y: -35.000) from
the center of R

2017/08/23 2- 36 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(3) Select the desired direction from “1. CW” and “2. CCW” in the teaching data area, input
the number, and push the [ENT] key.

(4) Select the desired mode from “1. Cutting mode” and “2. Position check mode” in the
teaching data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.

(5) Input values to “Depth”, “Height”, and “Return”, and push the [ENT] key.

Direction
• Clockwise (CW)
2

• Counterclockwise (CCW)

The setting method is the same as for line cutting.

(6) Input a value to “X/Y position” and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the X/Y position

Set the R center coordinates calculated from the Workpiece zero point.
Example) The center of R is
X: -100.000 -100 Workpiece
Y: -80.000 zero point

-80

Center of R
Y

Setting of “Peripheral speed” is the same as for center hole drilling.

2017/08/23 2- 37 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.3.2 Facing
1. Push [1] and [8] according o the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select the desired “Pattern” from the teaching data area, input the number, and push the
[ENT] key.

Cutting of square (back and forth)

2
Back & forth (-X) Back & forth (-Y)

Cutting of square (- direction)

One direction (-X) One direction (-Y)

3. Select the desired direction from the following six directions in the teaching data area, input
the number, and push the [ENT] key.

Select the desired direction from the 2 3 4


following six directions:
1. X-axis direction (No wall)
2. Y-axis direction (No wall)
3. X-axis direction (Wall on one side)
4. Y-axis direction (Wall on one side)
5. X-axis direction (Walls on both sides) 5 6
6. Y-axis direction (Walls on both sides)

4. Input values to “Length X” and “Length Y” and push the [ENT] key.
Setting the“Length X” and “Length Y”

Y
X/Y position

2017/08/23 2- 38 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Wall

X
Y

If “Wall on one side” is selected, the one with no wall must be X/Y position. 2
5. Decide that the “Cut back” should be 1. Workpiece on or 2. Workpiece off. Input the selected
number and push the [ENT] key.

1. If “Workpiece on” is selected, a tool moves together with a workpiece contacting with the
tool when the next line is cut.
2. If “Workpiece off” is selected, the tool completely gets off the workpiece and moves.

6. Input a value to “Ratio” or “Clearance” and push the [ENT] key.

If the Workpiece on is set, set the length of a tool contacting with a workpiece by the
“Ratio” for the tool diameter.
If the Workpiece off is set, se the distance “Clearance” between the workpiece end and the
tool periphery. Note that some amount may be left if the ratio is set at 50% or bigger.

Workpiece on (back and forth)


Workpiece off (back and forth)

Workpiece on (back & forth)

Ratio (%)

Workpiece off (back & forth)

Clearance (mm)

7. Input values to “Tool dia. (Rough finish)” and “Tool dia. (Finish)” and push the [ENT] key.

2017/08/23 2- 39 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

8. Input values to “Finish margin (Crosswise)” and “Finish margin (Bottom)” and push the
[ENT] key.

Set the XY axial finishing amount necessary for “Finish margin (Crosswise)”.
(If there us a wall)
Set the depth directional finishing amount necessary for “Finish margin (Bottom)”.

9. Input a value of “Infeed” and push the [ENT] key.

The “Infeed” means an infeed depth (α) of a tool per machining when the tool goes into the
desired depth of a workpiece in multiple times. If [0] is set in this “Infeed”, all the cutting
2 depths excluding the finish margin (Bottom) are cut in one time in rough finishing. In
finishing, if [0] is set in this “Infeed”, the finish margin (Bottom) is cut in one time.

• If 0.000 is set to “Finish margin (Crosswise)” and “Finish margin (Bottom)” when the
direction is specified with (Wall on one side) or (Walls on both sides), finishing is done
only to the wall.
If the (Bottom) is also to be finished, set 0.001 to each of “Finish margin (Crosswise)” and
“Finish margin (Bottom)”.
If finishing is not desired. Delete the finishing tool from the tool pattern for tool
assignment.
Or delete the finishing tool when tools are assigned.

Finish margin and infeed

Too

workpiece top
Infeed amount α

Infeed amount α

Finish margin (bottom)

Machined
workpiece top

2017/08/23 2- 40 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

10. Input a value to “Cutting width” and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the cutting width

1. Set the radial cutting amount by the ratio for the tool diameter when line is cut.

Cutting width

Cutting width
2

11. Input a value to “Depth” and ”Height” and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the “Depth” and “Height”

Roughing amount Depth

Height
Finishing amount
(Finish margin (bottom))

Z-axis workpiece zero

The “Depth” means all the cutting depths in rough finishing and finishing.
The “Height” means the height from the Z-axis workpiece zero to the workpiece top.

12. Input a value to “Return” and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the “Return”

Set the Z axial return amount when the first facing infeed amount is cut and the
next infeed amount is to be cut. (This is applied only when the pattern is “2.
Square (one direction)).

Return
amount
2nd infeed ワーク 1st finishing
position

The return amount is incrementally specified.


• Setting of “X/Y position” is the same as for face line milling.
• Setting of “Peripheral speed” is the same as for center hole machining.

2017/08/23 2- 41 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

1. Approach in facing job

Stop position before a workpiece (facing)

The approach method to enter a facing job is the parallel approach method
for the same direction as the specified cutting direction.
The cutting start position is the programmed X/Y position.

X/Y position
Stop position before a
Workpiece(facing) Y

X
Direction

The “Stop pos. before workpiece(facing)” is registered in the cutting conditions in the
databank.

2. To release from a facing job

With respect to the release from a facing job, the cutting tool vertically returns to the return
position between job after the last 1line cutting finishes.

(1) If the last cutting in the facing process is over, the tool returns to the return position
between job.

To release from a facing job (1)

Return position between job

Last line finishing position

2017/08/23 2- 42 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(2) If there is another infeed job, the tool returns only by the return amount.

To release from a facing job (2)

Return amount

Next infeed amount 2

In a square (-direction) cutting operation, the tool may interfere with


something when moving to the next line. In such a case, the tool returns to
the previous position of infeed height + return amount.

In - direction
Interfered here Next line

Tool

In finish margin (Crosswise) (back & forth)

Interfered here In finish margin (Crosswise)

Tool

2017/08/23 2- 43 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

3. Cutting width (only no wall)

The last line cutting width is decided according to the workpiece size and the remaining
cutting width. It does not always become the set cutting width.
In actual operation, the last is cut as follows.

(1) If the run-out amount from the workpiece end is 5 mm or less, the tool cuts with the
programmed cutting width.

Setting the cutting width (run-out amount 5 mm or less)


2 Run-out amount is 5 mm or less

Run-out amount
5mm
Programmed cutting
width

(2) If the run-out amount of a tool is 5 mm or more, the cutting width is automatically set so
that the tool periphery is positioned within 5 mm from the workpiece.

Setting the cutting width (run-out amount 5 mm or more)

The run-out amount is automatically set to 5 mm or less.


Run-out amount

5mm
Programmed
cutting width

4. Facing override

If “5. X-axis (both sides of a wall)” or “6. Y-axis (both sides of a wall)” is set, the first line
is cut twice. So it must be overriden. In that case, set the cutting condition “Facing
override.” Only the first line is overriden.

2017/08/23 2- 44 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.3.3 Pocketing
1. Push [1] and [9] according o the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select the necessary pattern from the following four pattern (pocketing system) in the teaching
data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key:
1. Circle, 2. Square, 3. Track – X/Y, 4. Track - Angle
3. Select one of the directions, 1. Clockwise (CW) and 2. Counterclockwise (CCW), from the
teaching data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the “Direction”

Select one of the spiral cutting directions, 1. CW (clockwise) and 2.


CCW (counterclockwise).
2

Circle pattern CW Circle pattern CCW

Square pattern CW Square pattern CCW

Track (X-Y) pattern CW Track (X/Y) pattern CCW


Track (Angle) pattern CW Track (Angle) pattern CCW

2017/08/23 2- 45 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

1. Setting the “Circle” pattern (pocketing system)


The setting items of the pattern selected from the procedure 2 differ.
(1) Input a value to “Radius” and push the [ENT] key.
(2) Input the circle center value to “X/Y position” and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the items for “Circle” pattern (pocketing system)

2 r Radius (Radius of a
pocket pattern)

X/Y position (Center


coordinates of a pocket
pattern)

2. Setting the “Square” pattern (pocketing system)


(1) Input values to “Lengths (X, Y)” and push the [ENT] key.

Set the X/Y axial length of a square pocket shape from the X/Y position. If it has angle
specification, set the X/Y axial length under the condition before rotation.

(2) Input a value to “Angle” and push the [ENT] key.

It the square pocket shape is inclined against the X-axis, set the CCW rotational angle
against the X-axis as the X/Y position is the center.

(3) Input a value to “Corner R” and push the [ENT] key.

If you want to make the 4 corner arcs of the square pocket shape bigger than the radius
of the tool used radius, set the radius.
If [0] is set, the tool automatically moves in the radius arc value of the tool used.

(4) Input a value to “X/Y position” and push the [ENT] key.

Make the reference position of the “Length (X, Y)” of the square pocket shape the X/Y
position.

2017/08/23 2- 46 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Setting the “Square” pattern (pocketing system)

Corner R
Length Y

Length X 2
X/Y position

Length Y

Corner
R Length X

X
Y
X/Y position
Status before rotation
X

2017/08/23 2- 47 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

3. Setting the “Track (X, Y)” pattern (pocketing system)


(1) Input a value to “Length X/Y” and push the [ENT] key.

Set the two arc center distances with the X and Y axial lengths respectively.

(2) Input a value to “Width” and push the [ENT] key.

Set the width (arc diameter) of the track pocket shape.

(3) Input a value to “X/Y position” and push the [ENT] key.
2 Input the value of an arc center of a track pocket shape based on the “Length (X, Y)”
being the reference position. (One arc center must be the X/Y position.)

Setting the “Track (X, Y)” pattern (pocketing system)

Another
arc center
Length Y

Width
Length X X/Y position

2017/08/23 2- 48 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

4. Setting the “Track-angle” pattern (pocketing system)


(1) Input a value to “Distance” and push the [ENT] key.

Set the distance between two arc centers of the track pocket shape.

(2) Input a value to “Angle” and push the [ENT] key.

If the X-axis is inclined against the track pocket shape, set the rotation angle based on
the XY position being the center.

(3) Input a value to “Width” and push the [ENT] key. 2


Set the width (arc diameter) of the track pocket shape.

(4) Input a value to “X/Y position” and push the [ENT] key.

For the X/Y position, input the value of the arc center on the left side when the angle of
the track pocket shape is 0.

Setting the “Track-angle” pattern (pocketing system)

Distance
Angle

X axis

Width
X/Y position

(5) Input values to “Tool dia. (Rough finish)” and “Tool dia. (Finish)” and push the [ENT]
key.

2017/08/23 2- 49 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(6) Input values to “Finish margin (Crosswise)” and “Finish margin (Bottom)” and push the
[ENT] key.

Setting the finish margin

2
Finish margin
(bottom)
Finish margin (crosswise)

• If 0.000 is set to “Finish margin (Crosswise)” and “Finish margin (Bottom)”,


finishing is done only to the most outside periphery.
If you want to finish the bottom, too, set 0.001 to both of “Finish margin (Crosswise)”
and “Finish margin (Bottom)”.
• If finishing is not required, delete the finishing tool from the tool pattern to assign
tools.
Or delete the finishing tool when assigning tools.

(7) Input a value to “Infeed” and push the [ENT] key.

If [0] is set, the workpiece is cut in one infeed both in rough finishing and finishing.

Setting the infeed and finish margin (bottom)

Infeed

Rough
finishing

Depth

Finishing

2017/08/23 2- 50 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(8) Input a value to “Cutting width” and push the [ENT] key.
i) Depending on the last cutting residual shape and the cutting width, the cutting width
of the first spiral line may become narrower than the set cutting width.
ii) As a result of path calculation, the tool may go into center part line cutting like minus
specification before entering spiral cutting.

Set the radial cutting width in spiral pocketing with the ratio of a tool diameter.
If the minus symbol is put before a value, the tool starts cutting from the center. If not,
the tool cuts in the shortest path.

Cutting width with a plus specified


The tool starts 2
L3 spiral cutting
Cutting directly from the
L2 depth L 1 position. This
can shorten the
Plus L1 cutting path.
specified

Cutting width with a minus specified


The tool starts
L3 from the L 1
Cutting position and
L2 depth starts line cutting
L 1 ' first and then
Minus goes into spiral
specified cutting.
L1 → L1'

Depending on the last cutting residual shape and the cutting width, the cutting width of the
last spiral line may become narrower than the set cutting width

2017/08/23 2- 51 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(9) Input a value to “Chamfering” and push the [ENT] key.

If chamfering is unnecessary, push [0].

Setting the “Chamfering”

Chamfer

(10)Input a value to “Crosswise interference” and push the [ENT] key.

If there is an interfering object like a boss on the side of a pocket part in chamfering, set
the interference distance.
If no, push [0].

Setting the “Crosswise interference”

Pocket

Crosswise interference

2017/08/23 2- 52 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(11)Input values to “Depth”, “Height” and “Return” and push the [ENT] key.

Setting the “Depth” and “Height”


Setting of “Depth” and “Height”

Depth in roughing
Depth

Finishing margin
(bottom) Height 2

Workpiece

Workpiece zero on Z

The “Depth” means all the cutting depths including the depths in rough finishing and
finishing.
The “Height” means the height from the Z-axis workpiece zero to the workpiece top.
The “Return” means the Z-axis return amount when the workpiece is cut in several times.
The return amount is set incremental.
Setting of “Peripheral speed” is the same as for center hole machining.

1. Approach in pocket milling job


Z-axial approach in a pocket milling job is perpendicular.

(1) The point where the approach rapid traverse changes to the cutting feed in pocket milling
job start is set by the cutting condition “Stop pos. before workpiece(pocket)”.
(2) When the Z-axis is cut more than twice, the position higher than the next cutting face by
the value set by “Return” becomes the approach point.

Setting the approach point (1)

Rapid traverse
Stop position
before workpiece
Cutting feed (pocket)

Return
amount
Next cutting
amount

(3) The approach way when only a finish margin (crosswise) is left is as follows:
The tool approaches the position off the X/Y finishing start position by the amount set by
the cutting condition “Stop pos. before workpiece(pocket)” and then starts cutting from
the position.

2017/08/23 2- 53 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Setting the approach point (2)


Stop position before a workpiece (pocket)

Finishing margin (crosswise)


2
2. To release from a pocket milling job
Pocket milling is released perpendicularly. The release distance is the return amount set by
“Return”. After the finish of machining, the tool returns to the return position between job.

To release from pocket milling

Return position between job

Return
amount

3. Chamfering
The tool approaches perpendicularly. The distance set by “Stop pos. before workpiece
(pocket)” is used.

Approach in chamfering

Stop position before


workpiece(pocket)
Chamfering milling tool
position (set by cutting
condition 3)

Chamfering angle is 45° (fixed).


When tools are compulsorily assigned, the chamfering angle follows the shape of the specified
tool.

2017/08/23 2- 54 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.3.4 Contouring
1. Push area [2] and [0] according to the teaching data and push the [ENT] key.

The input items out of the input items for contouring or chamfering (described later) which
differ from those for other cutting jobs are set by connection or intersection.
“Connection” is how to set the cutting axis motions (so-called connection blocks) which
constitute contouring.
“Intersection” is how to set the relative positioning relationship between the connection
blocks.

2. Select a “connection” from the teaching data area below, input the number, and push the 2
[ENT] key.

• Teaching data of the first connection


<1. Continuous start>
<2. Noncontinuous>

• Teaching data of connection after continuous start


<1. Continuous>
<2. Continuous finish>

2017/08/23 2- 55 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Status of “Connection”

1. Continuous start
This sets the first connection block when a different cutting axis motion continues one after
another.
2. Noncontinuous
This sets for cutting only one arc or line.
3. Continuous
This sets a connection block between the first and last blocks other than the cutting axis
motions for a line, arc, or the like as shown in Fig. below:
4. Continuous finish
2 This sets the last connection block in continuous blocks.

Continuous cuttings

Continuous finish

Program end
Continuous

Next connection block

Continuous start

First connection block

continuous cuttings

Noncontinuous Program start

Program end

In contouring, as the program is normally composed of multiple connection blocks (line and
other), it is programmed as follows:

Continuous Continuous
Continuous Continuous finish
start

Job 20 Connection Connection Connection


No. 02 No. XX No. XX
[ENT]

2017/08/23 2- 56 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Difference of input items of "Connection" types

Input items differ depending on the “Connection” types.

Input item
Continuous start Continuous Continuous finish Noncontinuous
Type
Pattern ○ ○ ○ ○
Intersection ○ ○
Corner ○ ○
Mode ○ ○ ○ ○ 2
End position ○ ○ ○ ○
Approach ○ ○
Release ○ ○
Tool diameter ○ ○
Finish margin ○ ○
Infeed ○ ○
Cutting start ○ ○
Peripheral speed ○ ○ ○ ○

3. Select a necessary pattern from the following four patterns (contouring and chamfering
systems) in the teaching data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.
1. Line (X/Y), 2. Line (angle), 3. Arc CW, 4. Arc CCW

(1) When “Line (X/Y)” is selected,


Set the length from the start point to the end point of the line to “Cutting length X” and
“Cutting length Y” in the X/Y axis direction.
Example: X 50.000, Y 25.000
If the cutting length is unclear, you can set if by pushing the [?] key.

Line (X/Y) pattern (contouring or chamfering system)

End point of line

Cutting length Y

Start point of line

Cutting length X

If the [?] key is pushed for setting, the length is automatically calculated. Calculation is
done in the tool assignment stage in preparation for operation.
If calculation is not done by pushing the [?] key, the <<? cannot be calculated>> alarm
appears. So confirm that there is no data setting error again, and set the values to the
setting items by pushing the [?] key referring to the Data setting table (1) listed below.

2017/08/23 2- 57 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(2) When “Line (angle)” is selected


When the line (angle) pattern is specified,
“Angle”: Set the CCW angle of the forwarding operation against the X axis.
“Cutting length”: Set the “Cutting travel length” of the line itself.
If both are unclear, push the [?] key for setting.

Line (angle) pattern (contouring and chamfering system)

Cutting End point of line


2 length

Angle

Start point of line

(3) When “Arc CW (Clockwise)” is selected


“Radius” Set the arc radius.
If Angle ≤ 180°, set a plus (+).
If Angle > 180°, set a minus (-).
“Center X” or “Center Y”: Calculate the arc center coordinate position from the
workpiece zero and set it.
“Angle” Set the angle from the arc start point to the arc end point.

Arc CW pattern (contouring and chamfering systems)

Tool
motion
Angle
Radius

End point
Center Y
Arc center
Workpiece zero
coordinates

Center Y
Arc CW

If the [?] key is pushed for setting, the value is automatically calculated. Calculation is
done in the tool assignment stage in preparation for operation.
If calculation is not done by pushing the [?] key, the <<? cannot be calculated>> alarm
appears. So confirm that there is no data setting error again, set the values referring to
the Data setting table (1), and correct the program so that the program completes by itself
(or data excessive).

(Note for setting plus (+)/minus (-) in For setting + For setting -
“Radius”) (Plus) (Minus)
If the “Center X” or both “Center Y” and
“Angle” are unclear, be sure to specify the
plus (+)/minus (-) in the arc pattern. The Start point
Start point

End point End point

2017/08/23 2- 58 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(4) When “Arc CCW (Counterclockwise)” is selected


Input the same items sequentially as in (3) and set them.
If the angle and center are unclear, push the [?] key to specify the CW/CCW pattern.

Arc CCW pattern (contouring and chamfering systems)

Radius
Angle

Center X
2

Workpiece zero Center Y

Select “Intersection” from the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.

This is a necessary setting item only in the connection status of the “Continuous (start)”
or “Continuous”.
For seeing the relationship of the intersectional positions of the “Connection block” in the
connection process of the program, select one from the following 4 options:
“1. Up” (Intersection where the Y axis value becomes big)
“2. Down” (Intersection where the Y axis value becomes small)
“3. Right” (Intersection where the X axis value becomes big)
“4. Left” (Intersection where the X axis value becomes small)

Setting an intersection (1)

Next connection Intersection 2


-Y job (CW) (Up right)

Up Radius
R
Intersection 1
(Down left)

Previous connection process


(Line (Angle))
Down
-X
Left Right

The above example shows two intersections on one line where an arc intersects.
The mere mutual relationship is as follows:
Intersection 1: Down or left
Intersection 2: Up or right

2017/08/23 2- 59 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Setting an intersection (2)

If intersection 1 is selected in a cutting program

Radius R Intersection in program:


CW Below or left

Intersection 1

Setting an intersection (3)

If the intersection 2 is selected in a cutting program

CW

Passing R Intersection in program:


intersection (1) Up or right

Setting an intersection (4)


Y
(Up , Left) Mutual position relationship
Up Intersection 2 between the intersection 1 and the
intersection 2
Intersection 1: Down or right
Intersection 1 Intersection 2: Up or left
(Down , Rright)

Down
X
left Right

i) There are two cases depending on data settings between connection blocks: one is that
an intersection can be specified with any of right, left, up, and down and the other is
that nothing can be specified even if the intersection is specified.
Check the required data items if the intersection cannot be calculated, using the data
settings tables (1), (2) and the intersection list as a reference.
ii) If the intersection value for “X axis Up” is the same, setting of “Up” or “Down” is
unavailable. Set “Right” or “Left” without fail.
If the intersection value for “Y axis Up” is the same, setting of “Right” or “Left” is
unavailable. Set “Up” or “Down” without fail.

2017/08/23 2- 60 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Setting an intersection (5)


+Y

Intersection 2 Up
Intersection 1
Left Intersection 2 Right
+X

Intersection 1 Down 2
Refer to the conditions for calculation and the intersection calculation table in chamfering
and the major figure and intersection in the same item.

4. Select the type of “Corner” from the teaching data area and input the number (1: Not specified,
2: C, 3: R). If 2 or 3 is selected, input a value to C or R and push the [ENT] key.

Set C for chamfering or R for rounding between connection blocks

The feedrate and peripheral speed in chamfering and rounding are the same as for the
conditions set for the connection blocks.

Setting a corner

C
Connection block edited next 2

For 1: Not specified


For 2: C

Currently
being created

R
Programmed line
For 3: R Actual cutting line

2017/08/23 2- 61 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Note for “C” or “R” set for “Corner”


If a distance longer than a start block or finish block is specified, the tool tip moves as each
block extended point is the start point or finish point of a corner.

Corner C: For line cutting

(4)

C
2 (7)
(3)

(2)
C
(6)
(1)
(5)

If the corner C amount is larger than the distance of (2) or (3) when the programming path
works as (1) → (2) → (3) → (4), the tool tip moves as (1) → (5) → (6) → (7) →(4).

Corner R: For line cutting

(4)

(3)
C

(7)
(2)
(6)
(1) C

(5)

If the corner C amount is larger than the distance of (2) or (3) when the programming path
works as (1) → (2) → (3) → (4), the tool tip moves as (1) → (5) → (6) → (7) →(4).

2017/08/23 2- 62 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Corner R: For line cutting

(7)

R
(4)

(3)
(6)
2
(5) (2)

(1)

If the corner R amount is larger than the distance of (2) or (3) when the programming path
works as (1) → (2) → (3) → (4), the tool tip moves as (1) → (5) → (6) → (7) →(4).

5. Select the necessary mode from the two modes, “1. Cutting mode” and “2. Position check
mode”, in the teaching data area, input the number and push the [ENT] key. Set the end point
reach check method of the connection block. The setting content is the same as for up milling.

6. Input a value to “End position X/Y” and push the [ENT] key.

If it is unclear, push the [?] key for setting.

7. Select the necessary approach from the following four in the teaching data area and push the
[ENT] key.
1. Vertical approach, 2. Parallel approach, 3. Right angle approach, 4. Arc approach

Select the approach method and set it in the first connection block.
Continuous (start) and noncontinuous approaches are the setting items.

Approach methods

1. Perpendicular approach Various


2. Parallel approach approaches
3. Right angle approach
4. Arc approach
1
2

2017/08/23 2- 63 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

If it is set by the [?] key, the approach method is automatically calculated. Calculation is done
in the stage of preparation for operation (tool assignment).
If calculation by the [?] key is unavailable, the <<? cannot be calculated>> alarm appears. So
check again to make sure there is no data setting error.
Refer to the after-mentioned Data setting tables (1) and (2) and correct the program so that it
completes by itself (or data excessive).

(1) Vertical approach


i) The X and Y axes move to “Cutting start position X” and “Cutting start position Y”.
ii) The Z axis moves to a position higher than the “Height” by the “Distance” amount.
iii) The Z axis moves in the cutting mode.
2
Vertical approach

distance

For the second and subsequent approach in infeeding


i) If the release method is also vertical and the approach “Distance” > release
“Distance”, the same value of the approach “Distance” as that of the release
“Distance” is automatically selected.
ii) If the release method is other than vertical and the (approach “Distance”
+ ”Workpiece height”) > “Return height”, the tool starts cutting from the “Return
height” position.

(2) Parallel approach


i) The X and Y axes are positioned at the place parallel away from the cutting start
positions X and Y by the amount of “Distance”.
ii) The Z axis is positioned at the first infeed position.
iii) The X and Y axes move in the cutting mode.

Parallel approach
Cutting start positions

Distance

2017/08/23 2- 64 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(3) Right angle approach


i) The X and Y axes are positioned at the place away from the cutting start position by the
amount of “Distance” in the diameter compensation direction.
ii) The Z axis is positioned at the first infeed position.
iii) The X and Y axes move in the cutting mode.

Right angle approach

Cutting
Diameter direction 2
compensation
direction (line left)

Cutting start position

Distance
Cutting allowance

(Note 1) This method is invalid if the diameter compensation is for a line


center.
(Note 2) Add the radius cutting allowance in the approach distance.

(4) Arc approach


i) The X and Y axes move to a place on the arc away from the “Cutting start positions X
and Y” by 90° in the diameter compensation direction.
ii) The Z axis moves to the first infeed position.
iii) The X and Y axes moves in the cutting mode and the arc cutting starts.

Arc approach

Cutting start
position

Cutting
allowance
Radius Cutting Diameter
direction compensation
direction
[Line right]

(Note 1) This method is invalid when the diameter compensation is applied


to a line center.
(Note 2) For the approach distance, add the cutting allowance in the
diameter direction.

When the approach setting is over, continue operation from procedure 8.

8. Input a value to “Distance” or “Radius and push the [ENT] key. For the distance, refer to each
item.

9. Input values to “Cutting start X” and “Cutting start Y” and push the [ENT] key. Set the start
position (X, Y) of the connection block.

2017/08/23 2- 65 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

10. Select a desired “Release” from the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.

Select the release method after the final connection block and set it.

(1) Vertical
(2) Parallel (If a minus (-) is input, the tool does not return in job.)
(3) Right angle
(4) Arc

If a minus (-) is input, the tool does not return in job even if all cuttings finish.
If it is input, an asterisk (∗) appears at the release item on the screen.
2 Example:) 
Release  Method ∗ Parallel  Distance
If the minus (-) is input, the Z axis position after the finish of the job becomes the return
dimensional position. However, it becomes the release distance in the vertical release.

(5) Vertical release


After the final connection block finishes, the tool tip returns up vertically.
If the vertical release is specified, the normal “Return” specification becomes invalid.
If the next infeed remains, the tool tip moves up to the position “Workpiece height” +
“Distance”.

Vertical release when the next infeed is specified

Distance

Workpiece height

Machining
surface
Z-axis workpiece zero

When the final infeed completes, the tool tip goes up to the “Return after job change
position”.

Vertical release after the final infeed completes

Return after job


change position

Machining surface
(Final) Z

Z-axis workpiece zero

2017/08/23 2- 66 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(6) Parallel release


After the final connection block finishes, the tool tip moves in the progressing direction
by the amount specified by the “Distance” amount in the cutting mode and finishes
cutting.
After that, if the Z axis finishes the final cutting infeed, it moves up to the “Return after
job change position”. If the Z axis cutting is not finished, the tool tip goes up to the
“Return position”.

Parallel release
Final connection block finish position
2

Distance

(7) Right angle release


After the final connection block finishes, the tool tip moves in the diameter compensation
direction by the amount specified by the “Distance” amount in the cutting mode and
finishes cutting.
After that, if the Z axis finishes the final cutting infeed, it moves up to the “Return after
job change position”. If the Z axis cutting is not finished, the tool tip goes up to the
“Return position.

Right angle release

Final connection block finish position

Distance

Radius compensation direction


[Line right]

Cutting
direction

(Note 1) This method is invalid if the diameter compensation is applied to a


line center.

2017/08/23 2- 67 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(8) Arc release


After the final connection block finishes, the tool tip moves in the diameter compensation
direction by the “arc” amount 90° specified by the Radius in the cutting mode.
After that, if the Z axis finishes the final cutting infeed, it moves up to the “Return after
job change position”. If the Z axis cutting is not finished, the tool tip goes up to the
“Return position”.

Arc release

2 Final connection block finish position

Radius

(Note) This method is invalid if the diameter compensation is applied to a


line center.

11. Enter the values for <Tool radius (Rough finish)> and <Tool radius (Finish)>, and press the
[ENT] key after entering each value.

12. Enter the values for <Finish margin (Crosswise)> and <Finish margin (Bottom)>, and press
the [ENT] key after entering each value.

Setting finish margin

Finish margin
(crosswise)

Finish margin
(bottom)

2017/08/23 2- 68 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

13. Input a value to “Infeed” and push the [ENT] key.

If [0] is set for the infeed, the entire cutting depth, except for the <Finish margin
(Bottom)>, is cut in one infeed operation when performing rough finishing.
When performing finishing as well, the <Finish margin (Bottom)>, is cut in one infeed
operation.

<Infeed> and <Finish margin (Bottom)>

2
Infeed

Finish margin
(bottom)

Select the necessary one from the following three “Diameter compensations” in the teaching
data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.

Cutter compensation direction

1. Line right 2. Line left 3. Line center

Programmed path

Tool center path

2017/08/23 2- 69 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

14. Input values to “Depth”, “Height”, and “Return” and push the [ENT] key each time when the
value is input.

Setting depth, height, and return

Depth
Return height

Workpiece height
Workpiece

Workpiece zero

The “Depth” means all cuttings including rough finishing and finish machining.
The “Height” means the height from the Z axis workpiece zero to the workpiece top.
The “Return” means the return height from the final connection block to the first connection
block when the tool cuts in several times. If the return value is set at 999.999, the tool does not
return. If the release is vertical, no vertical release is done, too.

Setting for “Peripheral speed” is the same as for center hole drilling.

Return: If the release is vertical, the return position is the distance for release and the return
dimensions are neglected.

2017/08/23 2- 70 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.3.5 Chamfering
1. Push [2] and [1] according to the teaching data and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input values to “Tool diameter” and “Angle” and push the [ENT] key each time when the
value is input.

Tool diameter and angle

Tool diameter

Angle

The setting items for “Connection”, “Pattern”, “Intersection”, “Corner”, “Mode”, “End
position”, “Approach”, “Release”, and “Cutting start” are the same for contouring.

3. Enter the values for <Interference (Crosswise)> and <Interference (Bottom)>, and press the
[ENT] key after entering each value.

It is possible for a tool to be preset with the interference dimensions between a tool and a
workpiece for prevention of the tool from being selected when tools are assigned.

<Interference (Crosswise)> and <Interference (Bottom)>

Interference
(bottom)

Interference (crosswise)

If [0] is set, interference is not checked.


Interference (bottom): If a contouring job is copied, it is necessary to input the amount of the
depth input in the contouring job.

2017/08/23 2- 71 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

4. Select the “Diameter compensation” from the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.

Tool diameter compensation direction

Programmed path
Tool center path

1. Line right 2. Line left

5. Input “Chamfering” values to “Height” and “Tool position” and push the [ENT] key each time
when the value is input.

Setting chamfering, height, and tool position

Chamfering

Tool
position Z-axis workpiece zero

Setting for “Peripheral speed” is the same for center hole drilling.
If [0] is specified to “Tool position”, the value for the cutting condition “Chamfering milling
tool position” is applied.
With respect to diameter compensation, the “Line center” for contouring becomes “Line right”
in chamfering.
If contouring is copied, it is necessary to input the amount of depth input in the contouring job.

How to change a contouring job to a chamfering job


Normally, no job type is changeable, but, as exclusion, contouring is changeable to
chamfering. It is convenient when the same position in contouring is used in chamfering.
1. Copy and load the contouring job. (Push the [F6] key.)
2. Move the cursor to a chamfering job.
3. Copy and insert contouring. (Push the [F7] key.)
4. Change the job type to chamfering.
5. The tool data (tool diameter, angle, interference (crosswise), interference (bottom),
chamfering, and tool position) are changed to [0], so set them again.

2017/08/23 2- 72 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

1. Conditions for intersection calculation and intersection calculation table


The intersection is automatically calculated by the data set in a connection block in a program.

Conditions for calculation of intersection


Type Contents
1. This is the content of currently set connection block data by which an
Self-complete intersection is automatically calculated and a correct position is fully
type determined.
Any of settings (Up, down, right, left) can be set for intersection. (However,
the item with the mark  in the Data setting table must be set for intersection.)
2. Data Data excessive for calculation of an intersection are currently set in the
excessive connection block data. 2
type As a correct intersection position is automatically calculated, any intersection
enquiry can be set.
Priority order is put between necessary data, set as effective data, and set as a
self-complete type.
Priority order
Pattern High low
 Line “End position X/Y” “Cutting length (X, Y)”
(X-Y)
 Line “End position X/Y” “Length” “Angle”
(Angle)
 Arc (CW/CCW)
“End position X/Y” “Center X, Y” “Radius” “Angle”

(However, set an intersection to the data with the mark  in the Data setting
table.)
3. Data No intersection can be found only by the currently set connection block data. It
insufficient is necessary to set the next connection block content and intersection.
type

: Refer to the following table to find out whether the data setting content is enough or not for
searching an intersection in each pattern.

Intersection is only one for the pattern (line → line), so intersection setting is unnecessary. So any
can be set for intersection.

2017/08/23 2- 73 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Data setting table (1)


Pattern 1 Status Cutting Cutting End position End position
Line number length X length Y X Y
(X/Y) L01 ? ? ○ ○

complete
L02 ○ ? ? ○

Self
L03 ? ○ ○ ?
L04 ○ ○ ? ?
L11 ○ ? ? ?

Data insufficient
L12 ? ○ ? ?
L13 ? ? ○ ?

2 L14
L15
?
?
?
?
?
? ?
L16 ○ ? ○ ?
L17 ? ○ ? ○
L21 [○] [○] ○ ○

excessive
L22 ? [○] ○ ○

Data
L23 [○] ? ○ ○
L24 ○ [○] ? ○
L25 [○] ○ ○ ?
Pattern 2 Status Angle Length End position End position
Line number X Y
(Angle) M01 ? ? ○ ○

self-complete
M02 ○ ? ○ ?
M03 ○ ? ? ○
M04 ? ○ ○ ?
M05 ? ○ ? ○
M06 ○ ○ ? ?
M11 ○ ? ? ?

insufficient
M12 ? ○ ? ?

Data
M13 ? ? ○ ?
M14 ? ? ? ○
M15 ? ? ? ?
M21 [○] [○] ○ ○

excessive
M22 ? [○] ○ ○

Data
M23 [○] ? ○ ○
M24 [○] ○ ? ○
M25 [○] ○ ○ ?

[ ]: Invalid data in relation to priority order of data


: Line and arc set in the data can be defined. So it is necessary to set an intersection. No
intersection can be set to connection (finish) or (Noncontinuous), so self-completion is
unavailable. Please set other statuses.

2017/08/23 2- 74 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Data setting table (2)


Arc Status End position End position
Radius Center X Center Y Angle
(CW) number X Y
(CCW) N001 ○ ? ? ? ○ ○
N002 ? ○ ○ ? ○ ○

Self-complete
N003 ? ? ? ○ ○ ○
N004 ? ○ ○ ○ ? ?
N005 ? ○ ○ ? ○ ?
N006 ? ○ ○ ? ? ○
N007 ? ○ ? ? ○ ○
N008 ? ? ○ ? ○ ○ 2
N101 ○ ○ ○ ? ? ?

insuffi
Data
cient
N102 ? ○ ○ ? ? ?
N103 ○ ? ? ? ? ?
N201 [○] ○ ? ? ○ ○
N202 [○] ? ○ ? ○ ○
N203 ○ ? ? [○] ○ ○
N204 [○] ○ ○ ? ○ ○
N205 [○] ○ ? [○] ○ ○
N206 [○] ? ○ [○] ○ ○

Data excessive
N207 [○] ○ ○ [○] ○ ○
N208 ? ○ ○ [○] ○ ○
N209 ? ○ ? [○] ○ ○
N210 ? ? ○ [○] ○ ○
N211 [○] ○ ○ ○ ? ?
N212 ? ○ ○ [○] ○ ?
N213 ? ○ ○ [○] ? ○
N214 [○] ○ ○ [○] ○ ?
N215 [○] ○ ○ [○] ? ○
N216 [○] ○ ○ ? ○ ?
N217 [○] ○ ○ ? ? ○
N301 ? ? ? ? ? ?
N302 ? ? ? ○ ? ?
N303 ? ? ○ ? ? ?
N304 ? ? ○ ○ ? ?
N305 ? ○ ? ? ? ?
N306 ? ○ ? ○ ? ?
N307 ? ? ? ? ? ○
Calculation unable

N308 ? ? ? ○ ? ○
N309 ? ? ○ ? ? ○
N310 ? ? ○ ○ ? ○
N311 ? ○ ? ? ? ○
N312 ? ○ ? ○ ? ○
N313 ? ? ? ? ○ ?
N314 ? ? ? ○ ○ ?
N315 ? ? ○ ? ○ ?
N316 ? ? ○ ○ ○ ?
N317 ? ○ ? ? ○ ?
N318 ? ○ ? ○ ○ ?
N319 ? ? ? ? ○ ○

2017/08/23 2- 75 eCOM3COPR2-2.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

intersection ist (Next connection block: Straight line)


: If no intersection is obtainable from the currently set connection block information due to a data insufficient, the intersection can be calculated by obtaining the
least necessary things from the following block information.
Next
connection Line (X-Y) Line (Angle)
Current Pattern
connection Self-complete Data insufficient Data excessive Data insufficient
Self-complete Data excessive
Status
Pattern L01 L02 L03 L04 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 L17 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25
Status

L11 C C C C C C C C

Lack of L12 C C C C C C C C
line (X-Y) C C C C C C C C
data L13

L14 C C C C C C C C

L15 C C

L16 C C C C C C C C

L17 C C C C C C C C

M11 C C C C C C C C C C C C
Lack of
M12 C C C C C C C C C C C C
right
angle C C C C C C C C
M13
(angle)
data M14 C C C C C C C C

M15 C C

N101 × × C C C C C C C × × × × C C C C C

N102 × × C C C C C C C × × × × C C C C C

Lack of N103 C C ×
arc data

Setting of intersection is necessary. C Intersection is obtainable. × Contact point is obtainable.


No intersection is obtainable. Minus of radius is decided. Arc rotational direction is decided.

2013/09/11 2 - 76 eCOM3COPR2-3.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Intersection list (Connection block: Arc)


Next
connection Arc
Current Pattern Data excessive
connection Self-complete Data insufficient
Status
Pattern N001 N002 N003 N004 N005 N006 N007 N008 N101 N102 N103 N201 N202 N203 N204 N205 N206 N207 N208 N209 N210 N211 N212 N213 N214 N215 N216 N217
Status

L11 C C C C C C C C C C

L12 C C C C C C C C C C
Lack of
L13 C C C C C C C C C C
line (X-Y)
data L14 C C C C C C C C C C

L15 × × × × × × × × × ×

L16 C C C C C C C C C C

L17 C C C C C C C C C C

M11 × C × C × × × C C C C × × C C C C
Lack of M12 C C C C C C C C C C
right
angle M13 C C C C C C C C C C
(angle) C C C C C C C C C C
data M14

M15 × × × × × × × × × ×

N101 × C × C × × × C C C C × × C C C C

N102 × C × C × × × C C C C × × C C C C
Lack of N103 × × × × × × × × × ×
arc data

Setting of intersection is necessary. C Intersection is obtainable. × Contact point is obtainable.


No intersection is obtainable. Minus of radius is decided. Arc rotational direction is decided.

2013/09/11 2 - 77 eCOM3COPR2-3.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2. Main drawing and intersection (self-complete)


When creating a program for a main drawing, decide what data can complete the program for
the drawing. All the following five examples (No. 1 to No. 5) show that the workpiece zero is
the cutting start point.

No. 1
This shows a self-complete example that can be programmed only by setting X & Y cutting
lengths.
Anything can be set to the intersection.
2

1 Connection block number 3

Cutting start point


4
+Y

φ 50
+X

Cutting Cutting End End


Connection Length
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner point point
No. Radius
Center X Center Y X Y
1 Line (X, Y) 0.000 50.000 - None ? ?
2 Line (X, Y) 50.000 0.000 - None ? ?
3 Line (X, Y) 0.000 -50.000 - None ? ?
4 Line (X, Y) -50.000 0.000 ? ?

No. 2
[Noncontinuous pattern]
Only setting the center coordinates (X, Y) and the end point (X, Y) can program for this arc
drawing.

CW

φ50
+Y

+X

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Arc 25.000 0.000 ? ? None 0.000 0.000
CW

2017/08/23 2 - 78 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

No. 3
When creating a 3-angle drawing, only inputting the angle and the end point (X, Y) of the
final connection block can self-complete the program.
Anything can be set to the intersection.
315 °

Connection Connection
block 1 block 2
+Y

45 ° 2
+X Start point
50.000

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length Intersec End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Corner
No. Radius tion point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Line 45.000 - None ? ?
(angle)
2 Line 315.000 50.000 0.000
(angle)

No. 4
This is a combination example of a Line and an arc.
As the intersections 1 and 2 are on the same X-axis, it is necessary to set “Right!” and “Left”.
100

R5 R15 R5
1 3
(50, -5)
Intersection 1 Intersection 2
“Left” “Right”

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length Intersect End point End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Corner
No. Radius ion X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Line 0.000 ? Left R5.000 ? ?
(angle)
2 Arc 50.000 -5.000 ? 15.000 Right R5.000 ? ?
CW
3 Line 0.000 ? 100.000 0.000
(angle)

2017/08/23 2 - 79 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

No. 5
This is an example of programming a drawing where two arcs are overlapping each other and
the overlapping part has a corner but the cutting path does not pass the intersection.
Two intersections 1 and 2 are made but it is necessary to set “Up” and “Down” or “Right” and
“Left” from the relationship of the positions.

No. 2
R5 (55, 30)
Connection “Up”
block No. 1 f50
2 Intersection
“Down”

Start point (25, 0) f50 +Y


R5

+X
No. 3

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Arc CW 25.000 0.000 ? 25.000 Up R5.000 ? ?
2 Arc CW 55.000 30.000 ? 25.000 Down R5.000 ? ?
3 Arc CW 25.000 0.000 ? 25.000 0.000 0.000

No. 6
This is an example of programming a drawing where the radius and the angle are neglected
according to the priority order. (Status number N207)
According to the priority order, the end point and the center are preceded and self-completed
by the status number N002. Here, even if any data are set to the radius and angle, they become
invalid because the programming path is decided even if these two data are set or not.
Y
End point

10.000

Start point
X

10.000

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Arc CW 0.000 0.000 30.000 30.000 - - 0.000 10.000
With the above Fig., the radius 30.000 and the angle 30.000 become invalid and the radius
becomes 10.000 and the angle becomes 90.000. So they become different from the setting
value.

2017/08/23 2 - 80 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

No. 7
This is an example of an arc pattern that tends to make a program path mistake depending on
the difference of radius symbols. (Status number N203)
According to the priority order, the end point and the center are preceded and, the angle is
neglected, and the programming self-completes by the status number N001.

Path 1
Path 2 2
X
End point 50.000 50.000

Path 1 (As this is the case of an arc within 180°, the radius must be specified with the plus
(+).)

(correct) Connection Cutting Cutting


Length End End
No. Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Arc ? ? 90.000 50.000 - - 0.000 0.000
CW

Connection Cutting Cutting


(false) No. Pattern length X length Y Angle
Length
Intersection Corner
End End
Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Arc ? ? 90.000 -50.000 - - 0.000 0.000
CW

Here, as the radius is specified with the minus (-), the angle is neglected and the programming path
is decided to the path 2.
Path 2 (As this is the case of an arc larger then 180°, the radius must be specified with the minus
(-).)

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
(correct) No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Arc ? ? 270.000 -50.000 - - 0.000 0.000
CW

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
(false) Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
1 Arc ? ? 270.000 50.000 - - 0.000 0.000
CW

Here, as the radius is specified with the plus (+), the angle is neglected and the programming path
is decided to the path 1.

2017/08/23 2 - 81 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

3. Special case for calculation of intersection


With respect to the “Intersection list table”, it is necessary to set an intersection. If it is not set,
the following can be calculated under the condition that there are some “Known data” in
incalculable ones.

(1) When there is an intersection in “Arc → Line” or “Line → Arc” and the Line is parallel to
the X- or Y-axis

1 (X, ?)
1(X, ?)
2 2
R Intersection
(?, Y) (X, Y) R 2
(X, Y)
Start point

Known data
Arc center coordinates (X, Y) and radius R,
Y coordinate of the end point of a Line and angle (0° or 180°) of the Line, or,
X coordinate of the end point of a Line and angle (90° or 270°)

Example of case 1): Drawing of two arcs combined with a Line


The intersection 1 and intersection 2 are created by the commands No. 1 and No. 2.
However, for the angle 0° (parallel to the X-axis) of a Line, the intersection is always
handled as “Right” even though the intersection is set as meaningless “Up” or “Down”.
So, the intersection 1 is neglected and the tool cuts to the intersection 2 in the arc mode.
On the other hand, if the angle against the Line is 180°, it is handled as “Left.”

Connection block No. 1


Intersection R5 R5
“Left” 1 No. 2
Intersection 2 Intersecti φ30
“Right” on 3
No. 3
No. 5
Y
No. 4
R5
X 40

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Inter-section Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
Arc Up/ down/
1 15.000 0.000 ? 15.000 R5.000 ? ?
CW right
Line
2 0.000 ? Left R5.000 ? 10.000
(angle)
Arc
3 55.000 0.000 ? 15.000 Left R5.000 ? ?
CW
Line
4 180.000 ? Right R5.000 ? -10.000
(angle)
Arc
5 15.000 0.000 ? 15.000 0.000 0.000
CW

2017/08/23 2 - 82 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(2) If there is no intersection between Arc and Line and that an arc links them.

Arc → Line

(Circumscribed circle inserted)


Connection block (?, ?) (?, ?) End point (X, Y)
No. 1 R1 R2 No. 3
No. 2 (?, ?)
(X, Y)
θ
2

(Inscribed circle inserted) End point (X, Y)

Connection block No. 1


R2 No. 3
R1 (?, ?)

Start point

No. 2
(?, ?)
θ

Here, it is impossible to connect with a “Corner R”.


Make a program using other arc as a connection block. (No. 2)
With respect to the intersection and the radius of an arc that connects the arc with a Line,
it is necessary to set the following:
“Intersection”: Set “Up” or “Down” for a circumscribed circle and set “Left” or “Right”
for an inscribed circle.
“Radius”: If the arc angle is 180° or larger, set the “Plus (+)”. If it is over 180°, set the
“Minus (-)”.

Known data
Center coordinates (X, Y) and radius R1 of the arc, angle θ of the Line, end point (X, Y),
and radius R2 of the inserted arc

2017/08/23 2 - 83 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Line → Arc
(Circumscribed circle inserted)

R2 End point (X, Y)


Connection block (?, ?) No. 2
No. 1 (X, Y)
R1
θ (?, ?) No. 3
2 Start point
(?,?)

(Inscribed circle inserted)

(?,?)
R2
(?, ?) R1

End point (X, Y)


θ
Start point
(?,?)

Known data
Angle θ against the Line, Center coordinates (X, Y) and radius R2 of the arc, Radius R1
of the inserted arc

Example of case 2): Program of a connection block of a Line connecting with an arc by
the connection block No. 2 of a circumscribed circle

No. 2 R2

R1 (X, Y)
No. 1 (?, ?)
End point (X, Y)
(?, ?)
θ No. 3
(?, ?)
Start point

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
Line
1 45.000 ? - None ? ?
(angle)
Arc
2 ? ? ? 30.000 Up /down None ? ?
(CW)
Arc
3 60.000 10.000 ? 10.000 70.000 10.000
(CCW)

2017/08/23 2 - 84 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(3) There is no intersection between two arcs, which are connected with other arc
(Circumscribed circle inserted)

Connection block (?, ?) R2 (?, ?) 3


No. 1 R1 R3
No. 2 End point
Start point (X, Y)
(X, Y) (X, Y)

2
Inserted block

Here, with respect to the intersection and the radius of an arc that connects tow arcs, it is
necessary to set the following:
“Intersection”: Set “Up” or “Down” for a circumscribed circle.

No. 2
(?, ?) (?, ?)
Connection block
R1 R3
No. 1 No. 3
(X, Y) (X, Y)
Start point End point
(X, Y)

“Circle-contact-circle”: Set “Left” or “Right” for a circle-contact-circle.

If a radius plus (+) is set for insertion of a circumscribed circle

1 α≤180
(?, ?) 3
Intersection 1 (?,?)
Intersection 2
2
Start point
End point
(X, Y)

In the connection block No. 2, set “Plus (+) radius” and “CCW”.
Radius: If the angle between two intersections made by the circle that connects two arcs is
180° or less, set the “Plus (+)”.
If it exceeds 180°, set the “Minus (-)”.

2017/08/23 2 - 85 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

When the minus (-) is set to a radius in inserting a circumscribed circle


2

α>180

1
3
(?, ?) (?, ?)
Intersection 1 Intersection 2
2 Start point
End point
(X, Y)

In the connection block No. 2, set “Minus (-) radius” and “CCW”.

Example of case 3): Program of two arcs connecting with the connection block No. 2 of
an inscribed circle and the connection block No. 4 of a circumscribed circle
For an intersection on a circle-contact-circle, set either one of “Right” or “Left”.
For an intersection on a circumscribed circle, set either one of “Up” or “Down”.
Radius: If the angle between two intersections made by the circle that connects two arcs is
180° or less, set the “Plus (+)”.
If it exceeds 180°, set the “Minus (-)”.
When the minus (-) is set to a radius in inserting a circumscribed circle

No.2

(?,?) R30
(?,?)
Connection block
No.1 φ20 φ20

No.3

No.5 (?,?) (?,?)


R10 No.4

25

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
Arc
1 10.000 0.000 ? 10.000 - None ? ?
CW
Arc
2 ? ? ? 30.000 Right/left None ? ?
CW
Arc
3 35.000 0.000 ? 10.000 - None ? ?
CW
Arc
4 ? ? ? 10.000 Up /down None ? ?
CCW
Arc
5 10.000 0.000 ? 10.000 None 0.000 0.000
CW

2017/08/23 2 - 86 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

4. Case of uncalculated intersection


If the <<? cannot be calculated>> alarm appears in tool assignment, check the following,
correct the program, and assign tools again.

(1) After tool assignment, call the <Calculation result> screen and check which connection
intersection of a job process cannot be calculated.
(For instance, if “Connection 03” is indicated, it indicates that intersection with the
connection 3 and the connection 4 cannot be obtained.)

(2) Correct the program according to the following conditions:

(i) If the connection that cannot calculate an intersection is noncontinuous, refer to the 2
“Data setting table” and check the status of the corresponding pattern.
If the resultant cause is a lack of data, set a value to the necessary item so that it
completes by itself. (Example 1)

e.g.1)
Noncontinuous type (Status L11)
Refer to the “Data setting table” and check if the data for the end point of the current
connection (connection 1) is fully established.

Cutting Cutting
Connection Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
Line
1 10.000 ? - - - - ? ?
(XY)

(Solution example)
Classify the statuses of the current connection (connection 1) from the “Data setting
table.”
Here, the pattern 1 (Line (X, Y)) shows that only the value for the cutting length X is set,
so it belongs to the status L11 and lacks of data. So it is necessary to additional set data.
The self-complete types of Pattern 1 set for the cutting length X are L02 and L04. So if a
value is set to an end point Y (e.g. 15.000 in the following figure) or cutting length Y (e.g.
10.000 in the following figure) to become the status L02 or L04, the end point is
established.

End point
Cutting
length
End
10.000
point
15.000

Start 10.000
point
X

(Explanation)
From only the cutting length X, you only know that the end point is on - - - line. (Status
L11)
So, setting the cutting length Y (Type L04) or end point Y (L02 type) can establish one
point to the end point.

2017/08/23 2 - 87 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

(2) If the connection that cannot calculate the intersection is continuous, check if the
intersection of a current connection and the next connection is full of data to establish.
As a result, if
i) The current connection is the self-complete type or too much data, specification to the
intersection is incorrect. Amend the intersection. (Example 2)

e.g.2)
Continuous type (Statuses M04 - L01)
Although the current connection is the self-complete type or too much data, no
intersection calculation is available.

2 Connection Status
Cutting Cutting
Length End End
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner
No. number Radius point X point Y
Center X Center Y
Line 20.00
1 M04 - - ? left - 10.000 ?
(angle) 0
Line
2 L01 - - ? ? - - 30.000 30.000
(XY)

(Solution example)
First, if you check the status of the current connection (connection 1) in the “Data setting
table”, you will know that it is the status M04 and the self-complete type. The intersection
should be set as “Up” or “Down” like figure but is set as “Left”. So intersection
calculation is unavailable. Accordingly, set the intersection to “Up” or “Down” again.

Y Program path on intersection

End point of End point of connection 2


connection 1
when the
intersection
is up
30.000
Radius
Program path on intersection
20.000 when the intersection is down

X
Start point of 30.000
connection 1

End point of connection 1 when


the intersection is down
10.000

ii) If the current connection (connection 1) lacks of data, refer to the “Intersection list
table.”
You can find out the intersection from the status number of the current connection
(connection 1) and the status number of the next connection (connection 2) in the
“Intersection list table.” If you cannot find it out, there are two solutions as follows.

a) To establish the end point of the current connection (connection 1)


Set the value to the necessary item so that it is completed by the “Data setting
table.”
(Example 3 (Solution example 1))

2017/08/23 2 - 88 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

b) To change the next connection (connection 2)


Set the value to the necessary item of the next connection (connection 2) so that
the intersection can be found out from the “Intersection list table.” (Example 3
(Solution example 2))

However, even if it satisfies with the “Intersection list table,” there are some
cases that cannot calculate the intersection. These could be the results of wrong
inputs of the intersection (same as for Example 2) and input data error  wrong
position relationship between the current connection and the next connection.
(Example 4)

(Example 3) 2
Continuous type (Statuses M11-N102)
Intersection calculation is unavailable from the “Intersection list table”

Cutting Cutting End End


Connection Status Length
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner point point
No. number Radius
Center X Center Y X Y
Line
1 M11 - - 30.000 ? Left - ? ?
(angle )
Arc
2 N102 10.000 10.000 ? ? - - ? ?
CCW

(Solution example 1)
Checking the current connection (connection 1) status from the “Data setting table”, you
will find out it is the status M11 and lacks of data. To make this current connection
self-completed, you will know that it can be self-completed by setting any of “Length”,
“End point X”, and “End point Y” from the “Data setting table.” This makes it possible to
calculate the intersection.

(Solution example 1)
Y
Current connection is set self-complete.

End point of
10.000 connection 1
End point Length
Y

30°
X
Start point of End point X
connection 1
10.000

(Solution example 2)
First, checking the current connection (connection 1) status from the “Data setting table”,
you will know that it is the status M11 and lacks of data.
In addition, checking the next connection (connection 2) status from the “Data setting
table”, you will know it is the status N102.
Applying these statuses in the “Intersection list table”, you will know that it has no mark
and unavailable of intersection calculation.
Checking that the intersection calculable next connection status of the current connection
status M11 from the ”Intersection list table”, N002, N101, etc. are possible for calculation
of intersection. For instance, you will know that N101 can be calculated from the “Data
setting table” by setting the radius.
Here, as the intersection of the current connection is specified with (Left), specification of
this intersection becomes valid and intersection calculation becomes possible as shown
below.

2017/08/23 2 - 89 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Solution example 2
Y
Data is added to the next connection

Radius

End point of connection 1 when


the intersection is up or right
2 10.000
End point of connection 1 when
30° the intersection is down or left
X
Start point of 10.000
connection 1

(Example 4)
Continuous type (Statuses M11-N101)
If intersection cannot be calculated even if the “Intersection list table” is satisfied

Cutting Cutting End End


Connection Status Length
Pattern length X length Y Angle Intersection Corner point point
No. number Radius
Center X Center Y X Y
Line
1 M11 - - 30.000 ? Right - ? ?
(angle )
Arc
2 N101 30.000 50.000 ? 20.000 - - ? ?
CCW

Here, due to the input data error the current connection does not intersect with the next
connection. Make the, the angle of the connection 1 or the radius of the connection 2
larger so that the intersection can be calculated.

20.000
No intersection
exists.

50.000

30° X
Start point of 30.000
connection 1

2017/08/23 2 - 90 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

When the angle of connection 1 is enlarged


Y

20.000
Intersection up or right
(End point of connection 1)

Intersection down or left


2
Angle X

Start point of connection 1

When making the radius bigger on line 2

Radius

Intersection up or right
(End point of connection 1)

Intersection down or left


30°
X
Start point of connection 1

iii) If the current connection cannot be calculated


a) Set the necessary value so that the current connection status can be
self-completed.
b) Refer to the “Intersection list table” and set the necessary value to the current
connection so that the intersection with the next connection can be calculated.

2017/08/23 2 - 91 eCOM3COPR2-4.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.4 To Set Non-cutting System Jobs


This section explains the procedure to set six jobs that do not accompany cutting.
1. Coolant, 2. Axis travel, 3. Signal output, 4. Subprogram call, 5. Program stop, 6. Coordinate
system setting

2.4.1 Coolant
1. Push [9] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select On or Off from the teaching data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.

2.4.2 Axis travel


1. Push [1] and [0] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select the “Travel position” from the teaching data area, input the number, and push the
[ENT] key.

“1. Specify XY position” :Input a value to “X” and “Y” respectively.


“5. Specify Z-axis position” :Input a value to “Z”-axis.
“8. Specify B-axis angle” :Input a value to the “B”-axis.
“13. Specify A-axis angle”: Input a value to the “A”-axis.
“2”, “3”, “4”, “6”, “7”, “11”, and “12”: Just set a value.
“1”, “5”, “8”, and “13”: It is necessary to set the travel position coordinates.
“9. Machine zero return (No. 2)”, “10. Machine zero return (No. 3)”, “11. A-axis zero return”,
and “14. B-axis zero return”: It is necessary to set the positions in the user parameters
beforehand.

2019/06/16 2 - 92 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.4.3 Signal output


1. Push [1] and [1] according to the teaching in the teaching data area, input the number, and
push the [ENT] key.
2. Input the “Code” number, and push the [ENT] key.
2-digit codes
If you want to continuously operate external equipment, output this signal and operate the
external equipment. (The output method is by BCD codes.)
However, depending on the code, it becomes a special motion.
As the codes “3” “4” and “30” are internal codes, they cannot be used.

3-digit codes
The 3-digit codes are used as output signals for tool changes and other special motions.
2
(1) Tool change by signal outputs
(Note) Tool changes by codes are available only in signal output jobs.
501-599 The tool is changed with a tool set by a code of the same
lower 2-digit in the tool list number.
Example) Code 501: Tool list number 1
Code 542: Tool list number 42
701-7?? (?? depends on The tool is changed with a tool set by a code of the same
the number of pots.) lower 2-digit pot number.
(1-49) Example) Code 701: Pot number 1
Code 708: Pot number 8
i) Tool change by a magazine pot number: Input “7??”.
(The part of “??” can be put with 01 to 49.)
Ex) For 701, the tool in the magazine pot No. 01 is changed.

ii) Tool change by a tool list number: Input “5??”.


(The part of “??” can be put with 01 to 99. )
Ex) For 501, the tool is changed with the tool in the magazine pot set with the tool
list No. 01.

(2) Preparation for the next tool by signal output (only for an arm swivel type magazine)
Preparation for the next tool is to index a magazine to the position where the specified pot
comes for a tool change.
(Note) Preparation for the next tool by codes is possible other than in a
signal output job.
601-699 The tool pot set by a code of the same lower 2-digit in the
tool list number is preparation for the next tool.
Example) Code 601: Tool list number 1
Code 642: Tool list number 42
751-7?? (?? depends on The pot of the number subtracted by 750 from the set code is
the number of pots.) prepared for the next tool.
(51-99) Example) Code 751: Pot number 1
Code 758: Pot number 8

i) Preparation for the next tool by a pot number: Input 751 to 799.
Specify the pot number subtracted by 750 from the setting value.
Example: For 751, the pot 01 is prepared for the next tool.
ii) Preparation for the next tool by a tool list number: Input 6??.
(The part “??” can be put with 01 to 99.)
Example: For 601, the pot set with the tool list 01 tool is prepared for the next tool.

For other 3-digits codes, refer to “Miscellaneous function” in “2.5.5 Miscellaneous


function list for motion calls”.

2019/06/16 2 - 93 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.4.4 Subprograms (calls)


1. Input [1] and [2] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input the number and push the [ENT] key. The number here means a subprogram number
(1-99).
3. Input a value to “X/Y position” and push the [ENT] key.
The X/Y position in a subprogram (call) is a reference position indicated with a relative
position from a workpiece zero.
The X/Y position in a subprogram is a machining start position indicated with a relative
position wherein a reference position is on the call side.
Setting of the “Peripheral speed” is the same as for center hole drilling.
2 Set the contents of a subprogram job after a main program finishes.
1. When contouring or chamfering is set in a subprogram, the peripheral speed and feed
set by the subprogram (call) job become invalid. The values for the peripheral speed
and feed set by the subprogram become valid.
2. When a motion call job is set in a subprogram and no machining pattern is used, the
X/Y position set in a subprogram (call) job becomes invalid and the X/Y position set in
the subprogram becomes valid.

If a machining pattern is used, the X/Y position set in a subprogram (call) job becomes
valid.

2.4.5 Program stop


Input [1] and [3] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
Program operation can be temporally halted.
This job can halt spindle rotation and cutting oil supply.

When the machine is restarted by the [START] switch, the spindle rotation and cutting oil are
automatically restored to the statuses before the program stop.

2019/06/16 2 - 94 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

2.4.6 Setting coordinate system


This job used for machining multiple workpieces of different shapes in one machining data
(program). It is necessary to set a coordinate system per workpiece. Here, the number of
workpieces at the head of the machining data must be 1. If the head of the machining data is set
with 2 or more workpieces, do not rotate the coordinates. (Correct machining becomes
available.)

Multiple coordinate systems

Coordinate system for workpiece 1 2


Coordinate system for workpiece 2

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

Setting coordinate system


Machining data
Job 1 Coordinate system setting
Job 2
Workpiece 1 Coordinate system setting contents of job
is machined. 1 is valid.
Job 10
Workpiece 1 Job 11
Coordinate system setting.
Job 12
Workpiece 2 Coordinate system
is machined. setting contents of job
11 is valid.
Job 18
Workpiece 2

2019/06/16 2 - 95 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

Once the coordinate system is set, the content of the coordinate system becomes effective to other
jobs thereafter.

1. Push [1] and [4] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Input a value to “Measurement No.” and push the [ENT] key.
The measurement No. is indicated on the Measurement results screen of the production
monitor. The input area is from 1 to 8.
When 1 to 8 is input, an offset amount is added to the measurement result of the input number.
If [?] is input, nothing is done.
In the automatic workpiece measurement results, the offset from the measurement result is
what is reflected in the workpiece coordinate system.
2 When the measurement motion is performed continuously, always perform the automatic
workpiece measurement from the same coordinate system.
If measurement is done in a different coordinate system or a coordinate system used with a
measurement result before a measurement is set, correct measurement data may not be
obtained.
3. Input a value to “Code” and push the [ENT] key.

When the coordinate systems are changed, the content set by the code is output outside as BCD.
If the [?] key pushed, no signal is output outside.

Refer to “2.4.3 Signal output”

Signal output

Job1 Coordinate system setting


A signal is output when the
Job 2 to 10
process moves to the other.
Workpiece 1 is machined
Job11 Coordinate system setting
Job 12 to 18
Workpiece 2 is machined

4. Input a value to “Index angle” and push the [ENT] key.


If the A/B axis is specified with a value, it is indexed as specified. If the [?] key pressed, the
angle set previously is indexed.

2019/06/16 2 - 96 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

5. Input a value to “Workpiece zero” and push the [ENT] key.


The workpiece zero of the coordinate system is the position from the workpiece zero of the
program head.
When the [?] key is input, the same value of the workpiece zero as set for the last set
coordinate system. If nothing is set for the last coordinate system set job, it is 0 and becomes
the same coordinate system as for the workpiece zero of the program head.
In addition, the [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key can set the machine coordinate value of the
current X/Y/Z/A/B axis to the workpiece zero. Move the cursor to the desired axis and push
[F5].

(Example) Screen for set workpiece zero of X/Y axis


2

Workpiece zero setting side

-150
-60
-X 90
Workpiece zero of
workpiece 1 -50
Workpiece 1 -105
-55
Workpiece 2 Workpiece zero of
workpiece 2
-Y

Workpiece zero of workpiece 1 Workpiece zero of workpiece 2


X -150.000 X 90.000
Y -50.000 Y -55.000
Z 50.000 Z 50.000

2019/06/16 2 - 97 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

6. Input a value to “Return height after coordinate change”and push the [ENT] key.

Set the Z-axis return height when moving to other coordinate system with the position from the
Z-axis workpiece zero.

Ex) Workpiece 2 (Return height after coordinate change = 150 mm)

Setting “Return H (coord. change)”

Return height after coordinate change


2
150 mm

Workpiece 1 Z-axis workpiece zero of


Workpiece 2
workpieces 1 and 2

Selection of higher return height after coordinate change

Good

Bad
Return height after
coordinate change
of workpiece 1

Workpiece 1
Workpiece 2

Return height after coordinate change of workpieces 2

(1) If the [?] key is pressed here, the same value for the return height after coordinate change
set for the coordinate system set job is set.
If nothing is the last job in the coordinate setting, the same value as for the return height
after job change of the program head is set.
(2) If the values of the return height before and after coordinate changes differ, the higher
return height after coordinate change is selected by machine coordinates value conversion
for safety purpose.

2019/06/16 2 - 98 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

7. Input a value to “Return height after job change” and push the [ENT] key.
Here, set the Z-axis return height with the position from the workpiece zero of the coordinate
system setting job when one job finishes in one coordinate system and other job starts in the
same coordinate system.

Setting Return height after job change

Workpiece 1
70 mm 2
Workpiece 2

Z-axis workpiece zero of workpiece 2

The return height after job change of the workpiece 2 in the coordinate system setting job is
70.000 mm.

If the [?] key is pushed, the same value of the return height after job change set in the last
coordinate system setting job is set.
If nothing is set for the last job in the coordinate system, the same value as for the Return
height after job change of the program head is set.

8. Input a value to “Tool change return height” and push the [ENT] key.
(This is valid only to a machine model whose magazine works together with the travel of the
Z-axis.)
Set the Z-axis return height with the position from the workpiece zero in the coordinate system
setting job when tools are changed in a set coordinate system.

Setting tool change return height

Tool change

Workpiece 1
70 mm
Workpiece 2

Z-axis workpiece zero of workpiece 2

The tool change return in the coordinate system setting job for the workpiece 2 is 70.000 mm.

If the [?] key is pushed, the same value of the tool change return height set in the last
coordinate system setting job is set.
If there is no coordinate system setting job in the last job, the same value as for the tool
change return at the program head is set.
In an actual tool change, the tool returns to the position where the tool pull-out amount is
added.

2019/06/16 2 - 99 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc
Chapter 2 Machining data

9. Input values to “Coordinate rotation” (“Angle”, “Center X”, and “Center Y”) and push the [ENT]
key.
If 1 to 8 is set in “Measurement No.”, the measurement result is used for coordinate rotation. So
setting of the “Angle” or “Center” is invalidated. Push the “?” key.
However, if the measurement result has no data, the “Measurement No.” becomes the same as
“?”.
If “?” is set in the “Measurement No.”, the coordinate rotates as specified by the “Angle” and
“Center.” Specify the “Center” with the machining coordinate position.
If coordinate rotation is unnecessary, set “?” to the “Angle” and “Center.”

2 Y Actual workpiece

Workpiece on
program
Workpiece

c
b Workpiece zero Rotation center
X
a

Set as follows:
Rotation center X = a
Y=b
Angle = c

(Note 1) Coordinate rotation is unavailable to the following X/Y travel:


• Zero return (including No. 2 and No. 3)
• Workpiece zero return
(Note 2) Coordinate rotation is cancelled by the following operation or command:
• Coordinate rotation command of angle 0.000°
• Command of program end (M30) (each program end for a schedule
program)
• Reset key
• Setting of a start point
• Others (when a memory operation is reset)
(E.g. zero return or tool change by manual mode or MDI input mode)
(Note 3) Coordinate rotation is valid only in memory operation. It is unavailable by
MDI input operation for X/Y travel.
(Note 4) Coordinate rotation center is not changed even though a coordinate
system setting is commanded because the machine is controlled under
the condition of the center as an absolute position. If you want to change
it, command a coordinate rotation again.
(Note 5) If multiple workpieces (the number of workpieces in at the head of the
machining data is other than 1) are machined, do not command a
coordinate rotation. Otherwise, coordinate rotation is not performed to
the second or after workpieces.

2019/06/16 2 - 100 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5 Motion Call


2.5.1 Outline of motion calls
2.5.1.1 Function of motion call program and related
machining data
Motion program means that not possible machining with settled movement in conversation type to
liberty to set the users knowledge for program.

How to create a motion call


1. Push [1] and [7] according to the teaching in the teaching data area and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select “1. On” or “2. Off” from the pattern in the teaching data area, input the number, and 2
push the [ENT] key.

The pattern mentioned here is the pattern indicated in the pattern list table.
Setting items thereafter change depending on the pattern specification “On” or “Off”.

Setting order according to the pattern On/Off


Pattern On Pattern Off
Tool No. Tool No.
Motion Motion (Indication)
(Indication)
Pattern
Frontward return
Backward return
X/Y position
Peripheral speed

If “1. On” is selected, hole positions are updated per hole position and machined. The job
pattern of the hole machining system can be used.

However, when the pattern is specified wit “1. On”, add a [Positioning - pattern] motion in the
motion call job.
Unless it is added, the too tip moves to the position specified by the machining pattern in
relation to the hole.

The setting items of the “Pattern”,“X/Y position”, and “Peripheral speed” when the pattern “1.
On” is selected is the same as for center hole machining.

2019/06/16 2 - 101 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Example of “Pattern On” in motion program

Tool motion
These motions are not included in a
Rapid traverse conversation type program, so create a
Cutting motion program.
2 Process of pattern (square)

If “2. Off” is selected, it is used for machining that does not use the above pattern.

3. Input the “Tool No.” and push the [ENT] key.


For a motion call program, note that tools are automatically set by the data registered in the
databank like a conversation type program.
For a tool used, input the Tool No. registered in the tool list of the databank.
4. Input the motion content on the motion call program. For details, refer to the after-mentioned
“To edit motion call program.”
5. Input [0] to “Motion” and push the [ENT] key. Then the motion edit finishes.

(Set the following only when the pattern “On” is set.)


6. Set the “Pattern.”
Select a desired pattern from “1. Circumference”, “2. Square”, and others.
7. Input a value to “Frontward return” or “Backward return” and push the [ENT] key.
Each indicates the following position:
Frontward return position: Z-axis return position before entering a motion call job
Backward return position: Z-axis return position when a motion call job finishes
If [?] is input to “Frontward return” or “Backward return”, no return motion is carried out.
8. Set “X/Y position” and “Peripheral speed.”

2019/06/16 2 - 102 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.1.2 Motion call program edit


This section explains the procedure to set a motion call program.
1. Select a motion from the teaching data area, input the number, and push the [ENT] key.
2. When all the motions are set, input [0], and push the [ENT] key.
Inputting [0] (Motion end) finishes motion call program setting.

For the notes in motion call program operation, refer to the after-mentioned “Notes on motion
program operation.”
Up to 99 motions can be registered for a motion call program.

2019/06/16 2 - 103 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.1.3 Notes on motion call program operation


This section explains items to be specially noted for operation of a motion call program.

1. Cutting motion
All the cuttings in a motion call program are carried out in the cutting mode. However, the
following applies the position check mode (imposition check).
• If the next motion is not the cutting mode
If it is necessary to check the cutting position in a continuous operation, insert a dwell
motion after the cutting motion.
*For cutting modes and position check modes, refer to “2.3 Setting Milling System Job.”
2 2. Axis travels and simultaneous motions
Simultaneous motion is carried out if an axis travel motion exists after the following motions:
Absolute/Incremental - Incremental
Absolute/Incremental - Absolute
Diameter compensation - Line right
Diameter compensation - Line left
Diameter compensation - Line center

With respect to machine zero return, Z-ax machine zero return, workpiece zero return, drilling,
and tapping, they are not handled as an axis travel motion. So no simultaneous motion is
carried out like above.
However, if an absolute/incremental motion and a diameter compensation motion are set as a
continuous motion, it becomes a simultaneous motion.
In addition, if an absolute/incremental motion or diameter compensation is set after a tool
change, it becomes a simultaneous motion done together with a tool change.

3. Tool change
If the first motion of a motion call program is X/Y axis positioning, a tool change motion is
carried out together with X/Y travel in a simultaneous motion.

4. Return height (job change)


Normal return height (job change) cannot be programmed into a motion call program.
When a motion call program is created with the hole machining position pattern, be sure to set
as follows:
If the “Pattern” is “On”, set “Frontward return” or “Backward return”.
If the “Pattern” is “Off”, set “Positioning –Z.”

5. Tool assignment
Select a necessary tool from the tool list (databank) as a motion call job and set it. Note that
the machine does not check whether the tool is correct or not.
In addition, the tool cannot be specified with miscellaneous functions (before cutting and after
cutting), compensation (tool length and tool diameter), and dwelling.

2019/06/16 2 - 104 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.2 Motion list table


2.5.2.1 “1. Positioning” motion group
1. Positioning group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanations on motions
motion call job
XY XY Positioning to the specified X and Y position.
Z Z Positioning to the specified Z position.
X/Y + spindle X,Y direction, Positioning to the specified X and Y position and at that time
Rotational the spindle is also rotated.
frequencies
Z + spindle Z direction,
Rotational
Positioning to the specified Z position and at that time the
spindle is also rotated.
2
frequency
Machine zero The X, Y, and Z axes are returned to their machine zero
return respectively.
Machine zero Tool tip returns to the positions specified by the X-axis zero
return (No. 2) return pos.(No.2) and Y-axis zero return pos.(No.2) of the
user parameter. The Z-axis is returned to the machine zero
Machine zero Tool tip returns to the positions specified by the X-axis zero
return (No. 3) return pos (No. 3) and Y-axis zero return pos (No. 3) of the
user parameter. The Z-axis is returned to the machine zero.
Z-axis Only the Z-axis is returned to the machine zero.
machine zero
return
Workpiece The X and Y axes are returned to their workpiece zero
zero return respectively. The Z-axis is returned to the machine zero.
Pattern Positioning to the predetermined point of a hole position
pattern.
Specified axis X, Y, Z A, B Up to 5 axes (X, Y, Z, A, and B) can be arbitrarily
positioned. “?” is set to the coordinates position of the axis
which is not specified with positioning.
Specified axis X, Y, Z, A, B Up to 5 axes (X, Y, Z, A, and B) can be arbitrarily
+ spindle direction, positioned and the spindle is also rotated. “?” is set to the
Rotational coordinates position of the axis which is not specified with
frequencies positioning.
A-ax machine The A-axis is returned to the machine zero.
zero
A-ax workpc. The A-axis is returned to the workpiece zero.
zero
.B-axis The B-axis is returned to the machine zero.
machine zero
B-axis The B-axis is returned to the workpiece zero.
workpiece zero

Specify the Z-axis coordinate value of the tool tip.


With respect to the motions of the machine zero return (No. 2 and No. 3), the Z-axis first returns to
the machine zero and then the X and Y axes simultaneous start return motions to the position
specified by the machine zero return position (No.2) or the machine zero return position (No.3).

• Additional axis (A or B axis)


If an A/B axis command is issued to a machine which has no A/B axis option, the <<Not a
valid A-axis program (****)>> or <<Not a valid B-axis program (****)>> alarm appears
when editing finishes.
(****) is the job number of a troublesome command.

In addition, if a program is taken from a machine having an A/B axis option or no motion is
commanded but an A/B axis program is set with a workpiece zero (not with “?” but with a
value), the <<No A-axis option>> alarm appears when memory operation starts and the
operation stops. For details of the motions, refer to “8(2) Index table.”

2019/06/16 2 - 105 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.2.2 “2. Cutting” motion group


2. Cutting group
Setting item in motion
Motion type Explanations on motions
call job
X/Y Feeds X, Y Tool tip cutting travel to the position set with X and Y
at the set feedrate.
Z Feed Z Tool tip cutting travel to the position set with Z at the
set feedrate.
X/Y + spindle Feeds X, Y Tool tip cutting travel to the position set with X and Y
direction. rotational at the set feedrate and the spindle is rotated
frequencies simultaneously.
2 Z + spindle Feed Zdirection. Tool tip cutting travel to the position set with Z at the
rotational frequency set feedrate and the spindle is rotated simultaneously.
Drilling Feed Z Tool tip moves to the position set with Z at the set
drilling feedrate.
Tapping Z rotational Tool tip moves to the position set with Z at the set
frequency rotational frequency in taping cycle.
Arc CW Feed, X, Y, center Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Y (End point),
X, center Y center X, and center Y in right turn at the set feedrate.
Arc CCW Feed, X, Y, center Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Y (End point),
X, center Y center X, and center Y in left turn at the set feedrate.
Arc CW + Feed, X, Y, center Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Y (End point),
spindle X, center Y, center X, and center Y in right turn at the set feedrate
direction, rotational and the spindle is simultaneously rotated.
frequency
Arc CCW + Feed , X, Y, center Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Y (End point),
spindle X, center Y, center X, and center Y in left turn and the spindle is
direction, rotational simultaneously rotated.
frequency
Specified axis Feed, X, Y, Z, A, B, An arbitrarily set axis (X, Y, Z, A, B) is positioned at a
radius set cutting feedrate. However, the combination of
travelling axes is as follows:
X, Y, Z, X/Y, X/Z, Y/Z, X/Y/Z, A, A/X, A/Y, A/Z, B,
B/X, B/Y, B/Z (Linear interpolation)
Specified axis Feed , X, Y, Z, A, B, An arbitrarily set axis (X, Y, Z, A, B) is positioned at a
+ spindle radius direction, set cutting feedrate and the spindle is simultaneously
rotational frequency rotated. However, the combination travelling axes is as
follows:
X, Y, Z, X/Y, X/Z, Y/Z, X/Y/Z, A, A/X, A/Y, A/Z, B,
B/X, B/Y, B/Z (Linear interpolation)
Thread Feed, X, Y, Z, center Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Y (End point),
cutting CW X, center Y center X, and center Y at the set cutting feedrate in
right turn and at the same time moves simultaneously
to Z (End point). Set the feed in the X/Y axis direction.
(The Z-axis feed is automatically calculated.)
Thread Feed, X, Y, Z, center Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Y (End point),
cutting CCW X, center Y center X, and center Y at the set cutting feedrate in left
turn and simultaneously moves to Z (End point). Set
the feed in the X/Y axis direction.
(The Z-axis feed is automatically calculated.)
Single Z, pitch /number of This is a function (returns motion is take away from the
direction mountains, pitch tapping motion). The tool taps to a specified position
tapping (number of and then stops at the position.
mountains),
rotational direction,
rotational frequency
X/Z arc CW Feed, X, Z, center X, Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Z (End point),
center Z center X, and center Z at a set feedrate in right turn
(CW) seen from the + Y-axis direction to the – Y-axis
direction on an X-Z plane.

2019/06/16 2 - 106 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Setting item in motion


Motion type Explanations on motions
call job
X/Z arc CCW Feed, X, Z, center X, Tool cuts an arc set with X (End point), Z (End point),
center Z center X, and center Z at a set feedrate in left turn
(CCW) seen from the + Y-axis direction to the – Y-axis
direction on an X-Z plane.
Y/Z arc CW Feed, Y, Z, center Y, Tool cuts an arc set with Y (End point), Z (End point),
center Z center Y, and center Z at a set feedrate in right turn
(CW) seen from the + Y-axis direction to the – Y-axis
direction on a Y-Z plane.
Y/Z arc CCW Feed, Y, Z, center Y, Tool cuts an arc set with Y (End point), Z (End point),
center Z center Y, and center Z at a set feedrate in left turn 2
(CCW) seen from the + Y-axis direction to the – Y-axis
direction on a Y-Z plane.
For details, refer to “2.5.4 Notes on cutting motions by motion calls and explanation ”.

2.5.2.3 “3. Spindle” motion group


3. Spindle group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanations on motions
motion call job
Right rotation Rotational The spindle is rotated at a set rotational frequency in right
frequency turn.
Left rotation Rotational The spindle is rotated at a set rotational frequency in left
frequency turn.
Stop The spindle is stopped.
Orientation The spindle is stopped at a fixed position.
Orientation to Spindle The spindle is stopped at a specified position.
fixed position orientation angle

2.5.2.4 “4. Dwell” motion group


4. Dwell group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanations on motions
motion call job
Time The machine waits for the set time..

2.5.2.5 “5. Absolute/Incremental” motion group


5. Absolute/Incremental group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanations on motions
motion call job
Incremental Set with incremental positioning, the axes travel in
incremental positioning until absolute positioning is
specified.
Absolute Set with absolute positioning, the axes travel in absolute
positioning until incremental positioning is specified.
If neither one is specified, the axes travel in absolute positioning.

2.5.2.6 “6. Miscellaneous function” motion group


6. Miscellaneous function group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanations on motions
motion call job
Code Set codes are output outside. In addition, some codes may
be used as a special function.
For details, refer to “2.5.5 Miscellaneous function list for motion calls”.

2019/06/16 2 - 107 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.2.7 “7. Diameter compensation function” motion


group
7. Diameter compensation group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanations on motions
motion call job
Line right Compensation Set compensation amount is compensated rightward to the
amount command value in a program. If the [?] key pushed, the
tool list is referred and the tool radius becomes the
compensation amount.
Line left Compensation Set compensation amount is compensated leftward the
2 amount command value in a program. If the [?] key pushed, the
tool list is referred and the tool radius becomes the
compensation amount.
Line center This is a motion that cancels the diameter compensation
mode (line right & line left) to make the axes travel to the
actually programmed position.

(Note) If not more than 14 motions are commanded to the X or Y axis or a travel
amount 0 is commanded during the diameter compensation mode, too
much cutting or lack of cutting occurs.

For details, refer to “2.5.6 Diameter compensation in motion call.”

2.5.2.8 “8. Measurement” motion group


8. Measurement function group
Setting item in motion
Motion type Explanations on motions
call job
Angle Necessary item in Square angle position on a workpiece, center line
Parallel each measurement position on a parallel boss (groove), center position
Circle center on a circular boss (groove), height position on
Z-axis height workpiece top, and rotation transformation angle
Rotation (2 points are automatically measured during memory
on X-axis) operation to reflect the measurement result in
Rotation (2 points motions.
on Y-axis)

(Note) “Measurement” is available only when the automatic workpiece


measurement function is valid.
If a program is created in a machine where the automatic workpiece
measurement function is invalid, the “No auto workpc. measurement
func.” alarm appears when the edit finishes.
If an automatic workpiece measurement motion is carried out in memory
operation, the <<No auto workpc. measurement func.>> alarm appears
and the operation stops.
If tools are assigned before operation, the <<No automatic workpiece
measurement function (****) >> appears and the tool assignment
incompletes. The (****) indicates the item number which has generated
the alarm.

For details, refer to “2.5.7 Automatic workpiece measurement in motion call.”

2019/06/16 2 - 108 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.3 Motion program value setting area table


Setting item in motion
Motion type Explanations on motions
call job
X/Y/Z -9999.999 to When the [?] key is pushed in a specified axis motion, the
9999.999 (mm) axis does not travel.
?
A/B Absolute: 0.000 to When the [?] key is pushed in a specified axis motion, the
359.999(°) axis does not travel.
Incremental:
-9999.999 to
9999.999(°) 2
?
Feed 1 to 99999 The feed is restricted to the top cutting feedrate specified
(mm/min) by the parameter (system).
? If the [?] key is pushed, the previously set feedrate is
used.
Rotational 1 to 99999 (min-1) The rotational frequency is restricted to the spindle top
frequency rotational frequency set by the parameter (system).
Time 0-99 (× 0.1 sec.)
Compensation 1 to 999.999 If the [?] key is pushed, the tool list in the databank is
amount ? referred to compensate the tool radius.
Code 0 to 999 3, 4, 30, 501-599, 701-749 cannot be set.

2019/06/16 2 - 109 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.4 Notes on cutting motions by motion calls and


explanation
2.5.4.1 Arc cutting
Specify the center (X, Y) of an arc or in helical thread cutting with the incremental amount seen
from the arc start point regardless of the absolute or incremental mode.

The center (X, Y) of the following figure, the arc (X, Y) becomes as follows:
X: 50
Y: 0
2 “Arc” command (X, Y)
+Y

100

Center
50 (X, Y)

50 100 +X

As well, specify the center (X, Z) of the arc (X, Z) or the center (Y, Z) of the arc (Y, Z) with the
incremental amount seen from the arc start point.
In addition, the cutting direction becomes CW or CCW as shown in the following figure:

“X/Z arc” command


+Z

100 CCW

50 (X, Z)
CW
+X
50 100

The center (X, Z) of the above figure, the arc (X, Z) becomes as follows:
X: 50
Z: 0

“Y/Z arc” command


+Z

100 CCW

50 (Y, Z)
CW
50 100 +Y

The center (Y, Z) of the above figure, the arc (Y, Z) becomes as follows:
Y: 50
Z: 0

2019/06/16 2 - 110 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.4.2 Single direction tapping


Single direction tapping is a function (return motion deducted from tapping motion). The tool tip
moves to a specified position in the tapping mode and stops there.

Items to be set for programming


Z : Z-axis target position traveled in tapping motion
Pitch/number of mountains : This is a method to specify synchronous motions of the spindle and
the Z-axis. The pitch is the Z-axis travel amount per spindle rotation.
The number of mountains is the number of mountains per inch.
Rotational dir. : Spindle rotational direction
Spindle speed : Spindle rotational frequency
2

2.5.4.3 Helical threading motion


1. The helical threading motion is a helical travel motion which moves the Z-axis drawing an arc
on an X/Y plane.

Tool

Workpiece

By performing the helical thread cutting motion, thread cutting of a diameter larger than a
normal tapping cycle can be performed.
However, the cutting is like milling, so the cutting time becomes the same as for milling,
longer than a normal tapping cycle.

2019/06/16 2 - 111 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2. Basic programming
Suppose the current spindle tool tip is at (X: 50.000, Y: 50.000, Z: 100.000).
If you want to perform a helical thread cutting motion CW from this position to the Z-axis
10.000 mm downward with the radius 30.000 (center (X: 50.000, Y: 20.000) per rotation (feed
at 1000 mm/min), program as shown in the following screen:

Y Z
Tool
Tool
100
(50, 50)
90
30

(50, 20)
X X
(0, 0) (0, 0)

In addition, if you want to feed the Z-axis 10.000 mm upward, set the end point Z at 110.00.

2019/06/16 2 - 112 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

3. Example of programming thread cutting using the thread cutting motion (In case of internal
thread)
Thread M48.0 (pitch 3.0) into a φ45.1 lower hole using a dedicated helical thread cutting tool.
(Suppose that the a φ45.1 lower hole has already been made.)

Cutting method
Thread cutting up the workpiece CCW from down in the Z-axis direction.
Approaching and releasing are respectively done on a 180° arc.
As the screw depth is deeper than the tool cutter length, it is cut in two cuts.

TOOL 2
M4 8. 0 × 3 . 0

30 . 0
3 0. 0 1 8. 0

1 5. 0 prepared hole diameter


50 . 0 4 5. 1

2019/06/16 2 - 113 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(Program 0001) Job 01 Machining data

* Cutting conditions (spindle rotational frequency and feedrate) are reference examples.

2019/06/16 2 - 114 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Expiation on programming

Motion 01: Diameter (tool radius) is compensated.


Motion 02: Tool is fed to the position (approach position) where a tool diameter is taken into
consideration so that the lower hole comes to the center as close as possible.
Motion 03: Tool tip is positioned at the point deeper than the workpiece bottom and the
spindle is simultaneously rotated.
Motion 04: This is an incremental positioning command, taking easy programming and
universality to others into consideration.
Motion 05: This is an approach motion of thread cutting to a workpiece. On a 180° arc, the
tool moves by a half pitch (1.5 mm) in the Z-axis direction.
Motion 06: Workpiece is cut in the thread cutting motion. One rotation is a pitch (3.0 mm) in 2
the Z-axis direction.
Motion 07: Workpiece is released from a thread cutting motion. On a 180° arc, the tool
moves by a half pitch (1.5 mm) in the Z-axis direction. The release position is
positioned as close as possible to the center of the lower hole as done in the
approach positioning.
Motion 08: The Z-axis is moved up by six pitches. The thread mountain position after
approaching must be at the thread mountain position of the previous cutting. In
this case, the position must be as close as possible to the center of the lower hole
as one in approaching or releasing.
Motions 09-11: Same as the motions 05 to 07
Motion 12: This returns to the absolute command.
Motion 13: The diameter compensation is cancelled.
Motion 14: Tool is taken out of a workpiece.
Motion 15: The spindle is stopped.

(Note 1) The “Feed” is set in the X/Y axis direction. (The feed in the Z-axis
direction is automatically calculated.)
(Note 2) The X/Y axial rotational speed is up to 360° (one rotation). (If two or more
rotations are required, perform two motions.)

2019/06/16 2 - 115 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

4. Example of programming thread cutting using the thread cutting motion (In case of external
thread)
Thread M48.0 (pitch 2.0) into a φ47.8 boss using a dedicated helical thread cutting tool.

Cutting method
Thread cutting down the workpiece CW from up in the Z-axis direction.
Approaching and releasing are respectively done on a 90° arc.
As the screw depth is deeper than the tool cutter length, it is cut in two cuts.

Tool
2
Boss 47.8
M48.0 x 2.0

40.0 32.0
30.0
18.0

50.0
15.0
First thread cutting approaching Actual cutting Release

Tool

Workpiece

Tool

2019/06/16 2 - 116 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Reference example of cutting conditions (spindle rotational frequency & feedrate)

2019/06/16 2 - 117 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Expiation on programming
Motion 01: Diameter (tool radius) is compensated.
Motion 02: Tool is approached to the other side of a boss in the + Y-axis direction. In this
case, it is about 4 mm opposite the boss.
Motion 03: Tool tip is positioned and the spindle simultaneously rotates. In this case, it is 16
mm down the boss top.
Motion 04: This is an incremental positioning command, taking easy programming and
universality to others into consideration.
Motion 05: This is an approach motion of thread cutting to a workpiece. On a 90° arc, the
tool moves by a 1/4 pitch (0.5 mm) in the Z-axis direction.
Motion 06: Workpiece is cut in the thread cutting motion. One rotation is a pitch (2.0 mm) in
2 the Z-axis direction.
Motion 07: Workpiece is released from a thread cutting motion. On a 90° arc, the tool moves
by a half pitch (0.5 mm) in the Z-axis direction. The release position is at the
front of the boss in the opposite direction of the approaching motion.
Motion 08: This returns to the absolute command
Motion 09: Tool tip moves to the next cutting approach position. In order to prevent the boss
from interfering, the tool performs helical thread cutting at top cutting speed.
The thread mountain position after approaching must be at the thread mountain
position of the previous cutting. In this case, the approach is the same as before,
so the position must be at the position 24.0-(7×2.0) =10.0 (Z-axis position of
motion 03 - integral multiple of a pitch).
Motion 10: This is an incremental command.
Motions 11-13: Same as the motions 05 to 07
Motion 14: This returns to the absolute command
Motion 15: The diameter compensation is cancelled.
Motion 16: Tool is returned to a safety position.
Motion 17: The spindle is stopped.

(Note 1) The feed is set in the X/Y axis direction. (The feed in the Z-axis direction
is automatically calculated.)
(Note 2) The X/Y axial rotational speed is up to 360° (one rotation). (If two or more
rotations are required, perform two motions.)

Example for setting a tool list

As the tool list has no tool for thread cutting, “Endmilling R” is used here.

2019/06/16 2 - 118 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.5 Miscellaneous function list for motion call


Miscellaneous function list

2-digit codes
Code Function
00 Temporary stop
Memory operation is stopped until the [START] switch is pushed. Spindle
rotation also stops. With respect to the conditions about coolant and spindle
rotation, they are stopped in a temporary stop status. But if the [START]
switch is pushed, they return to the status before the temporary stop.
05 Spindle rotation is stopped.
2
08 Coolant On: Cutting oil supply is started.
09 Coolant Off: Cutting oil supply is stopped.
19 Spindle orientation: The spindle is positioned at a fixed position.
Others BCD codes are output outside. However, 3, 4, & 30 cannot be used. If they
are set, the <<Input data error>>alarm appears.

3-digit codes
Code Function
111 Spindle orientation (180°): The spindle is positioned at a fixed position
(180° turned position by the signal output 19)
114 Tool diameter compensation is reset.
115 Step cycle invalid mode: Step cycle of drilling or tapping is invalidated.
116 Step cycle valid mode: Step cycle of drilling or tapping is validated.
120 If the breakage check detection signal is OFF, the <<*Tool breakage error>>
appears and the external output signal (Tool abnormal: TOOL) goes ON.
121 If the breakage check detection signal is ON, the <<*Tool breakage error>>
appears and the external output signal (Tool abnormal: TOOL) goes ON.
200 Tool breakage detection motion is validated. After this code is output,
201 breakage of the tool in the spindle is detected when the first tool is changed.
(This is valid to an arm swivel type ATC when the user parameter “Tool
breakage detection option” is “Type 2” (magazine tool breakage detection).)
For 200, the next motion is operated after the detection result comes out.
For 201, the next motion is operated before the detection result comes out.
203 Tool breakage detection motion is validated. After this code is output,
breakage of the tool in the spindle is detected when the first tool is changed.
(This is valid when the user parameter “Tool breakage detection option” is
“Type 3” (touch sensor).
Workpiece counter is switched valid/invalid.
211 211: Counter 1 is validated.
212 212: Counter 2 is validated.
213 213: Counter 3 is validated.
214 214: Counter 4 is validated.
221 221: Counter 1 is invalidated.
222 222: Counter 2 is invalidated.
223 223: Counter 3 is invalidated.
224 224: Counter 4 is invalidated.
Counter indication is counted up per count by a program end command.
Cancellation of counter specification is done by the following:
• Reset (machine lock)
• Program end
• Operation reset
• Power OFF
• 221-224 (invalidation of workpiece count)
(Example) If the count of the counter 1 is 1 and the count of the counter 2 is
2, the command of 211 to 212 counts up the counter 1 by 1 and the
counter 2 by 2 at the end of a program in a operation program.
238 Indication of waveform: Measurement start
239 Indication of waveform: Measurement end

2019/06/16 2 - 119 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Code Function
241-249 Tapping time constant 10-90%
250, 251 Fixed control of tapping time constant
252, 253, 254 Fixed control of tapping acceleration constant High speed / Medium speed /
Low speed
When 250/251 is commanded, Z-axis acceleration/deceleration in tapping is
performed in fixed time constant.
If 241-249 are commanded, Z-axis acceleration/deceleration in tapping is
performed in 10-90% of time constant.
However, if the <<Tap time constant too short>> appears, the Z-axis is
accelerated in constant motion.
2 When a command between 252 and 254 is issued, the acceleration and
deceleration of the Z-axis during a tapping operation is carried out at a
constant acceleration (high, medium and slow speeds).
260-267 High-accuracy mode A ON (level 1-8)
280-287 High-accuracy mode B ON (level 1-8)
269, 289 High-accuracy mode A/B OFF
High-accuracy mode A/B OFF is performed by the following, too:
• Reset (machine lock)
• Program end
• Operation reset
• Power OFF
270 Positioning end check distance (angle) is returned to the setting value of the
271-279 machine parameter.
Positioning is checked at the value set for “M271 Positioning end check
distance (or angle)” to “M279 Positioning end check distance (or angle).”
The following operations return the status to the positioning end check
distance unspecified or the positioning end check angle unspecified:
• M270
• Program end
• Operation reset
• Power OFF
• Reset (machine lock)

2019/06/16 2 - 120 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Code Function
290 With an ATC with a tool turret, the Z-axis speed can be changed after tools
291 are changed.
292 Z-axis descending speed 100% when tools are changed
293 Z-axis descending speed when tools are changed is returned to the setting
value of the machine parameter.
“Z-axis lowering speed 1 when changing tool”
“Z-axis lowering speed 2 when changing tool”
“Z-axis lowering speed 3 when changing tool”
Each command moves the Z-axis at the speed set by user parameter.
The following operations make M290 modal:
• M290 2
• Reset (machine lock)
• Operation reset
• Program end
• Power OFF
By setting the “Z-axis lowering speed when changing tool” small, the tool
change time becomes longer but the tool washing time can be longer as well.
(Note 1) MDI/memory operation can be commanded.
(Note 2) If the rapid traverse override is effective, the-axis
moves at the slowest speed.
(Note 3) If the “Z-axis lowering speed 1 to 3 when changing
tool” is larger than the “Z-axis rapid traverse rate
(when ATC)” of the machine parameter, the Z-axis
descends at the “Z-axis rapid traverse rate (when tools
are changed).”
(Note 4) These codes are invalid to the machine model with an
arm-swivel type ATC.
(Note 5) If tools are manually changed by manual interruption
after one of the codes M291-M293 is commanded in
MDI or memory operation, the descending motion
depends on the modal mode.
294 With a machine model with a tool turret, after the tool change magazine
swivels, the Z-axis descends at the speed set by the machine parameter
“Z-axis lowering speed when checking tool wash filter”
This is valid to the first tool change after the command. It does not always
become valid. It becomes valid at the time when the user parameter “Tool
wash filter check interval” is set.
(Note 1) Other than for a machine model with a tool turret or the
machine parameter " Spindle air blow/Tool wash
control method " set as “3: Method 4”, the user
parameter “Unregistered M-code” follows.
295 Depending on the status of the tool washing liquid level sensor, water is
supplied or discharged for an enough time to diagnose the failure of the
liquid level sensor. When an abnormality is detected, the <<Faulty tool wash
coolant level sensor>> alarm appears.
(Note 1) When the machine parameter <Spindle air blow/Tool
wash control method> is not set to <3: Type4>, it
follows the user parameter <Unregistered M-code>.
320 Detection signal of measuring device ON is checked.
321 Detection signal of measuring device OFF is checked.
340 Machining load monitor OFF
341 Machining load monitor ON
342 Machining load monitor ON (Max. only)
343 Machining load monitor ON (Min. only)
350 Thermal distortion compensation (X-ax)
351 Thermal distortion compensation (Y-ax)
352 Thermal distortion compensation (Z-ax)
353 Thermal distortion compensation (X/Y/Z ax)
355 Cancel thermal distortion compensation.

2019/06/16 2 - 121 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Code Function
360 Thermal distortion compensation (X-axis & ball screw)
361 Thermal distortion compensation (X-axis & spindle)
362 Thermal distortion compensation (Y-axis & ball screw)
363 Thermal distortion compensation (Y-axis & spindle)
364 Thermal distortion compensation (Z-axis & spindle)
365 Thermal distortion compensation (Z-axis & spindle)
366 Thermal distortion compensation (X/Y/Z axis & ball screw)
367 Thermal distortion compensation (X/Y/Z axis & spindle)
368 Thermal distortion compensation is cancelled (ball screw).
369 Thermal distortion compensation is cancelled (spindle).
2 400 M400 signal ON (Chip shower ON)
M400 signal OFF (Chip shower OFF)
401 The 401 commands the chip shower to go off in a time specified by the user
parameter “Chip shower retention time.”
402 M402 signal ON
403 M402 signal OFF
404 M404 signal ON
405 M404 signal OFF
406 M406 signal ON
407 M406 signal OFF
408 M408 signal ON
409 M408 signal OFF
The following operations set each signal OFF:
• Reset (machine lock)
• Power OFF
The signal is not set off by an operation reset or a program end.
This function is valid only to a machine with a quick table.
410 After the Z-axis is returned to the machine zero, the pallet 2 is indexed to
411 outside (front side). After the Z-axis returned to the machine zero, the pallet
1 is indexed to outside (front side).
418 Jig shower ON
419 Jig shower OFF
The following operations set each signal OFF:
• Reset (machine lock)
• Power OFF
The signal is not set off by an operation reset or a program end.
430 QT-axis (C-axis) unclamp
431 QT-axis (C-axis) clamp

2019/06/16 2 - 122 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Code Function
420 When using an arm type ATC mechanism, the ATC arm turn speed can be
421 changed after the code is executed for the next tool change command (Note
422 1).
423 420 : Turn the arm at the maximum speed that corresponds to the tool
432 type being changed.
• Standard tool turn speed when a standard tool is used (Note
2).
• Large tool diameter tool turn speed when a large diameter tool
is used (Note 3).
421/432 : Arm turns using the speed from the machine parameter (system
3) <AT-axis rapid feedrate 2>, regardless of the tool type being 2
changed.
422 : For the standard tool turning speed, the ATC arm turns at a
speed that calculated using the user parameter (switch 1) setting
<ATC arm turn speed ratio 1 (M422)>. (Note 4)
423 : For the standard tool turning speed, the ATC arm turns at a
speed that calculated using the user parameter (switch 1) setting
<ATC arm turn speed ratio 2 (M423)>. (Note 4)
(Note 1) This function is disabled on a turret type ATC
mechanism. When outputting, it follows user
parameter (switch 1) <Unregistered M-code>.
(Note 2) Set value for machine parameter (system 3) <AT-axis
rapid feedrate 1>
(Note 3) Set value for machine parameter (system 3) <AT-axis
rapid feedrate 2>
(Note 4) When all of the following conditions are met, the ATC
arm turning speed operates using a speed for the large
diameter tool.
• Tool type being changed is a large diameter tool
• Speed calculated using the ratio exceeds the turning
speed for a large diameter tool
Use the following operations to change to the M420 modal.
• 420 command
• Program end
• Reset (Machine lock)
• Operation reset
• Tool change
• Power OFF
434 Wait until pot/ATC arm shutter close
435 The magazine turn speed is returned to the value set by the machine
436 parameter.
437 Swivel at the rate set by “Magazine turn speed 1”
Swivel at the rate set by “Magazine turn speed 2”
(This is valid only to the ATC with a swivel arm.)
The speed is set at a ratio of the top speed set by the user parameter.
The magazine turn speed after M436 or after that is set at the ratio of the top
speed.
The magazine turn speed after the command is set at the ratio of the top
speed.
This parameter is not used for an ATC with a tool turret.
438 Pot shutter open
439 Pot shutter close
arm-turn type ATC equipment.)
440 B-axis unclamp
441 B-axis clamp
These commands are valid to a clamping mechanism set with the machine
parameter “1: Type 2 or 2: Type 3” when the B-axis motion is possible.
In other cases, the <<Not clamped/Not unclamped>> alarm appears.
After that, the B-axis unclamping/clamping is not automatic controlled.
If the [RST] key is pushed, the program ends, or the operation is reset under
the unclamped condition, the B-axis returns to the clamped status.

2019/06/16 2 - 123 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Code Function
442 A-axis unclamp
443 A-axis clamp
The detail is the same as for the B-axis (440/441).
448 Open ATC arm shutter r opens.
449 Close ATC arm shutter (This is valid only for the machine provided with
ATC arm shutter function.)
450, 451 One shot output (Next motion is performed after it is OFF.)
455, 456 One shot output (Next motion is performed before it is OFF.)
When the signal is output, it is set by the user parameter “One shot signal
450/451/455/456 output time.”
2 460 Waiting for input of M460 signal ON
461 Waiting for input of M460 signal OFF
462 Waiting for input of M462 signal ON
463 Waiting for input of M462 signal OFF
464 Waiting for input of M464 signal ON
465 Waiting for input of M464 signal OFF
466 Waiting for input of M466 signal ON
467 Waiting for input of M466 signal OFF
468 Waiting for input of M468 signal ON
469 Waiting for input of M468 signal OFF
When one of 460 to 469 is commanded, it waits for the 460 to 469 signals
going ON. The longest waiting time is set with the user parameter “External
signal reading time limit” When this time passes, the <<Signal output
timeout>> alarm appears.
474 Coil conveyor automatic mode: Enable
475 Coil conveyor automatic mode: Disable
(Note) When the machine parameter (system 1) <Coil
conveyor> is set to <0: Not equipped>, operation
follows the setting for the user parameter (switch 1)
<Unregistered M-code>.
476 Tool cleaning blowoff valve ON (MDI operation only)
477 Tool cleaning blowoff valve OFF (MDI operation only)
478 Automatic oiling / greasing cycle ON (MDI operation only)
479 Liquid removal cycle ON (MDI operation only)
480 M480 signal ON
481 M480 signal OFF
482 M482 signal ON
483 M482 signal OFF
484 M484 signal ON
485 M484 signal OFF
486 M486 signal ON
487 M486 signal OFF
The following operations also set the signal off:
• Reset (machine lock)
• Power OFF
It is not set off by an operation reset or a program end.
490-494 Center-through-coolant on.
495 Center-through-coolant off.
496 Back wash cycle on
The center-through-coolant also goes off by the following operations:
• Reset (machine lock)
• Power OFF
• Operation reset
• Program end
• Tool change
• Temporally stop command of signal output/miscellaneous function (00)
(This restores when the operation is restarted.)
• Tool change
• Alarm of servo system OFF class
• Alarm related to CTS of stop level 4 or 3

2019/06/16 2 - 124 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Code Function
497 Tool wash OFF when changing tool
The following operations also set washing OFF:
• Reset
• Operation reset
• Tool change
• M30
• Power OFF
498 Tool wash ON (MDI operation only)
499 Tool wash OFF (MDI operation only)
The following operations also set washing OFF:
• Reset (machine lock) 2
• Tool change
• Power OFF
It is not set off by an operation reset or a program end.
601-699 The next tool is prepared by specifying a tool list number. (This is valid only
for the machine provided with arm-turn type ATC equipment.)
751-799 The next tool is prepared by specifying a pot number. (This is valid only for
the machine provided with arm-turn type ATC equipment.)
801-899 The lowest two digits are output to PLC in BCD codes.
For details, refer to the PLC manual.
900-999 M900 signal and lowest two digits are output outside in BCD codes.

Reference: Codes deleted from the A series


117, 118 (Vertical feed step of endmilling tools: Valid or invalid)
122, 123 (Imposition check: Valid or invalid)
203-208 (Z-axis measurement function)
232, 233 (Automatic corner deceleration: ON or OFF)
234, 235 (High-accuracy cutting mode: Valid or invalid)
458, 459 (Water-off blow: ON or OFF)

2019/06/16 2 - 125 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.6 Diameter compensation in motion call


2.5.6.1 Tool diameter compensation of motion call
program
The tool diameter compensation is a function that compensates a compensation amount to an
actually programmed path in the specified direction.

Offset mode and cancellation mode


Programmed path
Programmed path Programmed path Tool center path
2 Tool center path Tool center path

5 5

1. Line right 2. Line left 3. Line center


Compensation Compensation
amount 5 mm amount 5 mm
Offset mode Cancellation mode

1. Conditions for offset mode


(1) Motions of line right and line left whose compensation amount is not 0 are instructed from
the line center mode.
(2) The first X/Y axis travel after the line-right or line-left motion is instructed is not an arc.

Start up motion

The first travel of the X/Y axis after a motion instruction of line-right or line-left is
called a Start up motion.
When both 1) and 2) above are satisfied, the operation goes into the offset mode.

Tool center path


Programmed path
5
B

The start up motion has 2 types: type 1, type 2 and is set by “Start up/cancel” command of the user
parameter 1 (switch 1).

(Note) Error occurred when programming position is same between before start
up and after start up (A and B position is a same place).

2019/06/16 2 - 126 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2. Conditions for the cancellation mode


(1) Power is ON.
(2) Reset is ON.
(3) Program is ended.
(4) The first X/Y axis travel after line-center motion instruction is not on an arc.
(5) Diameter compensation is reset.
(6) When a start point is set or program numbers are changed

Cancel motion

The first travel of the X/Y axis after a line-center motion is instructed from the offset
mode is called a Cancel motion. 2

Programmed path
Tool center path

The Cancel motion has 2 types: type 1 and type 2, and is set by “Start up/cancel
command of the user parameter (switch 1).

2019/06/16 2 - 127 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

3. Explanation of the words and symbols appearing hereafter


(1) Explanation of “Inside” and “Outside”
“Inside” means the angle of an intersecting angle measured on the workpiece side is 180°
or more when a travel is commanded.
“Outside” means the intersecting angle is less than 180°.

Inside
θ

2
Line right
Workpiece side
180°≦θ

Outside

Line left

θ
Workpiece side

(2) Explanation of the symbols in Fig.


: Programmed path
: Tool center path
: Auxiliary line
L : Line
C : Arc
R : Tool diameter compensation amount
θ : Workpiece side angle
T : Tangent arc
CP : Intersection
S : Single operation stop point

2019/06/16 2 - 128 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.6.2 Tool path in start-up


1. When a tool travels inside -----------the workpiece side angle (θ) ≥ 180°
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (1)
θ

Line
right 2

(2) Line →Arc


Tool path (2)
θ

2. When the tool travels outside


The start-up motion has 2 types: type 1 and type 2, and is set by “Start up/cancel” command of
the user parameter 1 (switch 1).

Start up / Cancel →■

2019/06/16 2 - 129 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

3. When a tool travels outside in blunt angle-------- the workpiece side angle is 90° ≤ (θ) < 180°.

Type 1
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (3)

S L
Line left

2 L

(2) Line → Arc


Tool path (4)



Line left r

L T
θ

Type 2
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (5)

CP

Line left
r r L

2019/06/16 2 - 130 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(2) Line → Arc


Tool path (6)





r r
Line left
L T
θ

4. When the tool tip moves outside in acute angle.----- Workpiece outside angle (θ) < 90°.

Type 1 Type 2
(1) Line → Line (1) Line → Line
Tool path (7) Tool center path (9)


Line right

θ Line right r
r θ

r L

S L S r L

(2) Line → Arc (2) Line → Arc


Tool path (8) Tool center path (10)

Line right
Line right L

θ r r θ
T T
r L r

S S r


If the tool tip travels outside a nearly parallel angle (179° ≤ θ < 180°), even if the type 2 is
chosen from the user parameter “Start up /cancel”, the actual motion is done in the type 1.
If the tool tip travels outside a narrow angle (θ ≤ 1°), even if the type 2 is chosen from the
parameter, the actual motion is done in the type 1.

2019/06/16 2 - 131 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.6.3 Tool path in offset mode


1. When the tool tip travels inside-------- the workpiece side angle is (θ) ≥ 180°.
(1) Line → Line (2) Arc → Line
Tool path (11) Tool path (12)

θ θ



CP
2 S L
CP

L Line right
Line right

(3) Line → Arc (4) Arc → Arc


Tool path (13) Tool path (14)
θ
θ

T T
CP
CP
S T
C S
L C C

Line right
Line right

(5) Line → Line


Tool path (15)

r L Line right

L r
Offset
θ≦1゜ Vector


S r

If the tool tip travel in narrow angle (θ ≤ 1°) and the offset vector becomes too big, it travels
as shown above.

2019/06/16 2 - 132 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(6) Line → Arc


Tool path (16)

r C L Line right



S r

2

The tool path goes the same for Arc → Line and Arc → Arc.

(7) Line → Line


Tool path (17)

S L

Line right

If the tool tip travels inside a nearly parallel angle (180° ≤ θ < 181°), it travels as shown
above.

(8) Line → Arc


Tool path (18)


L S
Line right

The tool path goes the same for Arc → Line and Arc → Arc.

2019/06/16 2 - 133 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

• When there is no intersection


Tool path (19)

S θ
Motion10 Motion11 L



Line right S Motion12

If there is no intersection in a travel inside, the tool tip travels as shown above.
The path compensated does not intersect in the motion 11 and motion 12, so there is no
intersection CP.

• When there is an intersection


Tool path (20)

θ
Motion10 Motion11

CP r
L L
S S
Line right

Motion12

2019/06/16 2 - 134 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2. When the tool tip travels outside in a blunt angle


------------ the workpiece side angle is (θ) 90° ≤ θ < 180°.
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (21)

θ
r r

Line right
L 2
L S
CP

(2) Line → Arc


Tool path (22)

r θ
Line right



S T
L C

(3) Arc → Line


Tool path (23)

θ
Line right

C r


S Line right

2019/06/16 2 - 135 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(4) Arc → Arc


Tool path (24)

Line right

(5) Line → Line


Tool path (25)

Line right

(6) Line → Arc


Tool path (26)
θ

Line right

If the tool tip travels outside a nearly parallel angle (179° < θ < 180°), it travels as shown
above.

2019/06/16 2 - 136 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

3. When the tool tip travels outside in an acute angle------- the workpiece side angle is (θ) < 90°.
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (27)

θ
2

Line right

(2) Arc → Line


Tool path (28)

Line right

2019/06/16 2 - 137 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(3) Line → Arc


Tool path (29)

2 θ

Line right

(4) Arc → Arc


Tool path (30)

C T
C

L
r r
θ
T

L r
C

S r
L Line right
C

2019/06/16 2 - 138 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.6.4 Tool path in offset cancel


1. When the tool tip travels inside --------- the workpiece side angle is (θ) ≥ 180°.
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (31)
θ

Line right
Center
2

(2) Arc → Line


Tool path (32)
θ

Center
Line right

2. When a tool travels outside in blunt angle---- the workpiece side angle is 90° ≤ (θ) < 180°.
Cancellation motion has two types, type 1 and type 2.
Set user parameter (switch 1) by “Startup/cancel” command.

Type 1
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (33)

θ L
Center

Line right L S

2019/06/16 2 - 139 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(2) Arc → Line


Tool path (34)

θ L

T Center

r
2
B

Line right C

Type 2
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (35)

θ
Center
L
L
Line right S
L CP

(2) Arc → Line


Tool path (36)
Center

θ
L
T
r
L
L S
CP
Line right
C

If the tool tip travels outside a nearly parallel angle (179° < θ < 180°), even if the type 2 is
chosen from the user parameter “Startup /cancel”, the actual motion is done in the type 1.

2019/06/16 2 - 140 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

3. When the tool tip travels outside in an acute angle--- the workpiece side angle is (θ) < 90°.

Type 1
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (37)
Center

2
Line rightL S

(2) Arc → Line


Tool path (38)

L
T
Center

C
Line right

2019/06/16 2 - 141 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Type 2
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (39)

L
Center

L
2
S
CP
L

L
Line right

(2) Arc → Line


Tool path (40)

L
Center

θ
T S
CP
L

T
Line right
C
L

If the tool tip travels outside a narrow angle (θ ≤ 1°) in Line →Line, even if the type 2 is
chosen from the parameter, the actual motion is done in the type 1.

2019/06/16 2 - 142 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.6.5 If compensation direction is changed in offset


mode
If a compensation direction is commanded to change in the offset mode, the “inside” and “outside”
are not discriminated; so the motion becomes common.

1. If an intersection exists after normal offset (Example of under Fig.: Line right → Line left)
(1) Line → Line
Tool path (41)
CP

Line left
S 2
Motion 10 L

Line right
Motion 12
L

The motions of this case are as follows:


:
Motion 04: Diameter compensation -Line right
:
Motion 10: Cutting - XY
Motion 11: Diameter compensation - Line left
Motion 12: Cutting - XY
:

(2) Line → Arc


Tool path (42)
C

Line left

S
L Line right CP

(3) Arc → Line


Tool path (43)

Line left

L
C
Line right
S
CP

2019/06/16 2 - 143 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(4) Arc → Arc


Tool path (44)
Line left

C
Line right

S
2 CP

2. If an intersection does not exist after normal offset


Move the tool tip perpendicularly to the start point after the diameter compensation direction
change by the amount of compensation

(1) Line → Line


Tool path (45)

S
Line left
L
L
Motion 10 Motion 11
Motion 13
Line right
L

The motions of this case are as follows:


:
Motion 04: Diameter compensation - Line right
:
Motion 10: Cutting - XY
Motion 11: Cutting - XY
Motion 12: Diameter compensation - Line left
Motion 13: Cutting - XY

(2) Line → Arc


Tool path (46)

S
Line left
L
r
r
T
L

r
Line right
S C

2019/06/16 2 - 144 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

(3) Arc → arc


Tool path (47)

Line left S
C

2
C
L SL
Line right
CP
Center
Center

The case where an arc becomes one round or more by changing the compensation
direction is as follows:
Tool path (48)

Line right
Line right
C
L L

P01 P02

Line left

2019/06/16 2 - 145 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

If a diameter compensation motion of the same compensation amount in the same direction is
specified in the offset mode, the diameter compensation amount is offset at the travel end
point immediately specified last in the perpendicular direction regardless the relationship
between the inside and outside.

(1) Line → Line


Tool path (49)

Motion 12

2 θ
Motion 10
Line right

r L
Line right

L S

The motions of this case are as follows:


:
Motion 04: Diameter compensation -Line right
Motion 10: Cutting - XY Same compensation amount
Motion 11: Diameter compensation -Line right
Motion 12: Cutting - XY
:

(2) Arc → Line


Tool path (50)

θ
T
Line right

r L

Line right C

* This goes the same with Line → Arc and Arc → Arc.

2019/06/16 2 - 146 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

If 14 or more motions which have no X/Y axis travels in the offset mode are commanded

Tool path (51)


θ
Motion 25

r
Motion 10
S

L
2
L
Line right

The motions of this case are as follows:


:
Motion 04: Diameter compensation -Line right
:
Motion 10: Cutting -XY
Motion 11: Dwelling
Motion 12: Spindle - Right rotation 14 or more motions which have no X/Y axis
: travel are commanded.
Motion 24: Miscellaneous functions
Motion 25: Cutting - XY

If a diameter compensation amount is commanded to change in the offset mode, the diameter
compensation amount is offset from the end point commanded for the diameter compensation
amount.

Tool path (52)

This is calculated by the offset amount r of


motion 06. This is calculated by the
CP offset amount r1 of
motion 07.
S S
L
L L
Line left
Motion 8 r1
r

Motion 10 Motion 9

The motions of this case are as follows:


:
Motion 04: Diameter compensation - Line left
: Different diameter compensation
Motion 06: Cutting-XY amount
Motion 07: Diameter compensation- Line left
Motion 08: Cutting -XY
Motion 09: Cutting -XY

2019/06/16 2 - 147 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Travel at the corner: If a tool tip travels outside of a workpiece side angle (θ) < 90° and “∆Vx”
or “∆Vy” becomes smaller than the user parameter “Corner travel limit” after calculation, the
vector b is neglected.
Accordingly, the tool center path becomes P1 → P2 → P4.

Tool path (53)


ΔVx

ΔVy
P2
2 r
P3
P1 a b r L
Line left L Ignored

r P4

r
Line left
C
θ

2.5.7 Automatic workpiece measurement by motion call


2.5.7.1 Automatic workpiece measurement
You can automatically measure a workpiece square angle position, parallel boss (pocket) center
line position, circular boss (pocket) center position, workpiece top height position, and coordinate
rotation angle in a memory operation to reflect the measurement result in motions.

Automatic workpiece measurement setting method


1. While creating a motion program, push the [8] key according to the teaching in the teaching
data area, and push the [ENT] key.

2. Select a desired measurement type from the teaching data area and input the necessary
parameter for the measurement according to the teaching.

Measurement types to be set


1. Angle, 2. Parallel, 3. Circle center, 4. Z-axis height, 5. Rotation (X-axis 2 points ),
6. Rotation (X-axis 2 points )

2019/06/16 2 - 148 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.7.2 Angle measurement

Measurement No.: Select the registered number from 1-4 that store measurement results. By
setting this measurement No. to the coordinate system setting item, the
measurement result can be reflected to the coordinate value in the coordinate
system setting job process.

Shape (1: Pocket, 2: Boss)


(Pocket) (Boss)

Workpiece Workpiece

Offset Y

Measuring position
Offset X

Reference position X/Y: Estimated value of angle


Offset amount X: X-axis coordinate position in Y-axial measurement. Offset amount
from (X, Y)
Offset amount Y: Y-axis coordinate position in X-axial measurement. Offset amount
from (X, Y)
Z-axis position Height: Input the Z coordinate in measurement
Z-axis position Return height: Input the Z coordinate of the return position

Remarks:
The stop position before the workpiece measurement is specified in the user parameter (automatic
workpiece measurement).
The amount of offset from the reference position is set to the measurement result position XY.

2019/06/16 2 - 149 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.7.3 Parallel measurement

Measurement No.: Select the registered number from 1-4 that store measurement results. By
setting this measurement No. to the coordinate system setting item, the
measurement result can be reflected to the coordinate value in the
coordinate system setting job process.
Shape: Specify the Pocket/Boss.
Reference position X/Y: Estimated value of pocket (boss) center
Meas. dir. Specify the X direction for measuring a shape parallel with Y.
Specify the Y direction for measuring a shape parallel with X.

+Z

+Y

(Pocket, X direction) +X

(Boss, X direction)

Width: Width of pocket (boss)


Z-axis position Height: Input the Z coordinate to be measured.
Z-axis position Return height: Input the Z coordinate of the return position.

Remarks:
When the X direction is measured, the offset amount from the reference position X is set in the
measurement result position X. When the Y direction is measured, the offset amount from the
reference position Y is set in the measurement result position Y.

2019/06/16 2 - 150 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.7.4 Circle center measurement

Measurement No.: Select the registered number from 1-4 that store measurement results. By
setting this measurement number in the coordinate system setting job, the
measurement result can be reflected to the coordinate value in the
coordinate system setting job process.
Shape: Specify the Pocket/Boss.
Reference position X/Y: Estimated value of pocket (boss) center
Radius: Input the circle radius to be measured.
Meas. points: Specify the measurement point from 3- or 4-point measurement.
Z-axis position Height: Input the Z coordinate to be measured.
Z-axis position Return height: Input the Z coordinate of the return position.

(Pocket: 3-point measurement) (Boss: 4-point measurement)

Remarks:
The offset amount from the reference position X is set in the measurement result position X. The
offset amount from the reference position Y is set in the measurement result position Y.

2019/06/16 2 - 151 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.7.5 Z-axis height measurement

Measurement No.: Select the registered number from 1-4 that store measurement results. By
setting this measurement number in the coordinate system setting job, the
measurement result can be reflected to the coordinate value in the
coordinate system setting job process.
Measurement position: Input the X/Y coordinate values to the measurement position.
Z-axis position Height: Input the estimated value to the Z-axis height.

Remarks:
The offset amount from the Z-axis position height to the measurement result position Z.

2019/06/16 2 - 152 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.7.6 Rotational measurement (X-axis 2 points)

Measurement No.: Select the registered number from 1-4 that store measurement results. By
setting this measurement number in the coordinate system setting job, the
offset amount is added to the coordinate value in the coordinate system
setting job process and the measurement result is input to the angle and
center coordinates of the coordinate rotation.
Shape: Specify the pocket/boss.
Reference position: Estimated value of the center coordinates in the coordinate rotation
Offset X1; X-axis coordinate position in the first Y-axial measurement. Input the
offset amount from (X, Y).
Offset X2: X-axis coordinate position in the second Y-axial measurement. Input the
offset amount from (X, Y).
Offset Y: Y-axis coordinate position in the X-axial measurement. Input the offset
amount from (X, Y).
Z-axis position Height: Input the Z coordinate for measurement.
Z-axis position Return height: Input the Z coordinate of the return position.

(Shape: boss)

Measurement result position

Angle
Reference position

Remarks:
The offset amount from the reference position is set to the measurement position result (X, Y).
The measurement result position is set to the center (X, Y).
The angle (angle referenced to the X-axis) is set to the rotation.

2019/06/16 2 - 153 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.5.7.7 Rotational measurement (Y-axis 2 points)

Measurement No.: Select the registered number from 1-4 that store measurement results. By
setting this measurement number in the coordinate system setting job, the
offset amount is added to the coordinate value in the coordinate system
setting job process and the measurement result is input to the angle and
center coordinates of the coordinate rotation.
Shape: Specify the pocket/boss.
Reference position: Estimated value of the center coordinates in the coordinate rotation
Offset amount X1; X-axis coordinate position in the first Y-axial measurement. Input the
offset amount from (X, Y).
Offset amount X2: X-axis coordinate position in the second Y-axial measurement. Input the
offset amount from (X, Y).
Offset amount Y: Y-axis coordinate position in the X-axial measurement. Input the offset
amount from (X, Y).
Z-axis position Height: Input the Z coordinate for measurement.
Z-axis position Return height: Input the Z coordinate of the return position.

Reference position

Measurement Angle
result position

Remarks:
The offset amount from the reference position is set to the measurement position result (X, Y).
The measurement result position is set to the center (X, Y).
The angle (angle referenced to the Y-axis) is set to the rotation.

2019/06/16 2 - 154 eCOM3COPR2-5.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.6 Finish Operation and Subprograms


2.6.1 Ending a Main Program
This section describes the main program ending procedure.

1. After the main program setting is finished, input [0] to the job requirement and push the
[ENT] key.

2. The main program end message appears on the display and then the subprogram number
inquiry screen appears.

2018/03/28 2 - 155 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.6.2 Setting a subprogram


This section describes the procedure of setting a subprogram in a main program.

1. Input a number in <No.> and push the [ENT] key.

2. Set the contents of the subprogram job sequentially according to the questions asked by the
screen.

The jobs to be set in a subprogram are all the cutting jobs that can be set in a main program
and motion call jobs.
In order to call and operate a subprogram, it is necessary to have a subprogram call job set
in the main program beforehand.

3. When the subprogram has been set, input [0] to the job requirement, and push the [ENT] key.

4. Push the [F0] key to enter the edit end mode. Input [0] to finish the program.

2018/03/28 2 - 156 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.6.3 Ending an edit


This section describes the program ending procedure.

1. After all the main program settings have been finished, input [0] (0.Job end) to the job number
input area and push the [ENT] key.
2. After all the subprogram settings have been finished, input [0] (0:End) to the subprogram
number input area and push the [ENT] key.
3. Push the [F0] key (Completion mode) to enter the edit completion mode.

(Note) When edited programs are currently running and the program which is
running takes up 2 MB or more so that extension memory operation is
required, the message <End editing after operation is completed> is
2
displayed, and the save and exit operation or overwriting operation is not
possible.
In addition, when edited programs are currently drawing and the program
which is drawing is bigger than 2 MB, the message <Quit editing after
drawing is completed> is displayed, and the save and exit operation or
overwriting operation is not possible.
The edit completion mode has two screen indications, either one of which is automatically
indicated according to the edit content.

• Completion mode 1:
If there is no tool assignment data or if data unrelated to the tool assignment is changed even
though there is tool assignment data, push any of [F0] to [F7] to finish editing.

[F0] (Cancel w/ saving changes): The edited content is registered in a memory.

[F3] (Cancel w/o saving changes): All the edited contents are made invalid. Accordingly, they
are not registered in the memory. However, the overwritten
content does not become invalid.

[F4] (Comment): The comment setting mode is called.

[F6] (Overwrite save): The contents ever edited are overwritten in a file and the
screen returns to the edit status. However, when editing a
program that is running in extended memory operation, or
when editing a program that is bigger than 2 MB during a
drawing operation, the [F6] key cannot be pressed.

[F7] (Edit mode): The data setting mode is called again.

2018/03/28 2 - 157 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

• Completion mode 2:
If tool assignment data exists and a change is made to the tool assignment related data, push
any of [F0] to [F7] to finish editing.

[F0] (Cancel w/ saving changes): Edited content is registered in a memory. The tool assignment
data remains the same. However, tool assignment remains
unfinished, so assign tools again for safety.

[F1] (Delete assignment and cancel):Edited content is registered in a memory. The tool assignment
data is deleted.

[F3] (Cancel w/o saving changes): All the edited contents are made invalid. Accordingly, they
are not registered in the memory.

[F4] (Comment): The comment setting mode is called.

[F6] (Overwrite save): Contents ever edited are overwritten in a file and the screen
returns to the edit status. However, when editing a program
that is running in extended memory operation, or when
editing a program that is bigger than 2 MB during a drawing
operation, the [F6] (Overwrite) key cannot be pressed.

[F7] (Edit mode): Data setting mode is called again.

2018/03/28 2 - 158 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.6.4 Comment Setting


If the [F4] (Comment) key is pushed on the edit end mode screen, the comment set mode is called.

Comment setting screen (for creating a new comment)

• Use panel keys to input a comment.


The maximum number of letters used is 18.

• Delete function:
Move the cursor to the letter to be deleted and push the [DEL]. Then letter under the cursor is
deleted.
In addition, when the [BACK SPACE] key is pushed, the letter immediately before the cursor
is deleted.
In addition, the cursor travel is made by [←] or [→] key.
Example:
If the letter “A” is desired to be deleted from the comment “ABC”,
push the [←] key once. The cursor moves to “A” of the “ABC” part.
Next, push the [DEL] key. Then it becomes like “BC”.
Example:
If the letter “B” is desired to be deleted from the comment “ABC”,
push the [→] key once. The cursor moves to “C” of the “ABC” part.
Next, push the [BACK SPACE] key. Then it becomes like “AC”.

• Insertion:
This is normally the overwriting mode. But the overwriting mode is switched to the insertion
mode by pushing the [INS] key. When the insertion mode is active, the insertion LED is lit.

• About registration:
Input a comment and push the [F0] (Completion) key to call the edit end mode screen. Here,
by pushing the [F0] (Cancel w/ saving changes) key or the [F1] (Delete assignment and
cancel) key, the comment is registered.

(Note) If the [F3] (Cancel w/o saving changes) key is pushed, the input comment
is not registered.

2018/03/28 2 - 159 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.7 Re-editing Machining Data


This section explains about the procedure to re-edit (delete, insert, travel, copy, or search) created
machining data.

Before re-editing machining data, confirm that the memory has a enough residual amount more
than the memory use amount for re-editing machining data and start editing. (The same goes with
deletion.)
If the memory lacks of a residual amount, the <<*Memory overflow>> error appears during
editing or when editing finishes and the edit data may become invalid.

2 Contents of function keys

[F0] key (Completion mode)


When this key is pushed, editing finishes.
Refer to “2.6.3 Ending an edit”

[F1] key (Previous job) or [F2] key (Next job)


Move the cursor to the previous job ([F1]) or next job ([F2]) before the currently
indicating job.
When the [F1] key pushes, the previous job appears. When the [F2] key is pushed, the
next job appears.

[F3] key (Search)


Use this key to move the cursor to the specified job number or subprogram number. This
is convenient for searching quicker.

[F4] key (Add)


By pushing this [F4] key after inputting a value, the input value can be added or
subtracted. Input a minus [-] to subtract.

[F6] key or [F7] key (Copy function)


This is a key to copy a job or a subprogram.

2018/03/28 2 - 160 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.7.1 [F3] <Search> key


This search function key [F3] is convenient for searching or checking a content in a long program
quicker. Move the cursor to the specified job number or subprogram number.

Machining data search


Job search : [Job number] + [F3] <search>.
Job, motion or connection search: [job number] + [/] + [motion or connection
number] + [F3] <search>
Motion or connection search in current job : [/] [motion or connection number] [F3] <search>

After the search completes, the cursor moves to the searched job, motion or connection, which
appears at the head of the screen.
2
e.g.1) Job search
If you want to refer to a job number 30, input [30] and push the [F3] (search) key. The
screen indicating the job 30 appears.

e.g.2) To search a subprogram


If you want to see the subprogram number 50, input [-] and [50] and push the [F3] (search)
key. Then the screen indicating the subprogram 50 appears.

When you input a desired subprogram number, first add [-] without fail. To search a motion or
connection from a subprogram, input [-] + [Subprogram No.] + [/] + [motion or connection
number] and push the [F3] (search) key.

2018/03/28 2 - 161 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.7.2 [INS] (insertion) key


This key is used to add various data to an already set program.

e.g.1) To add a job


Here, a tapping job is inserted.

Job 3 Hole Coolant Job 4

2
New job Tapping

1. Move the cursor to the job next to the job you want to newly add using the [F3]
(search) key or [PAGE] or [CURSOR] key.
2. Push the [INS] key. The data before the job 4 is cleared and the screen requires you to
input something new.
3. Following the teaching on the screen, sequentially input the content you want to insert.
4. After all the necessary items set, the newly input tapping job is set as a job 4.
5. The coolant originally set as the job 4 is automatically corrected to the job 5.

If a job is desired to add to the final job, move the cursor to <Main program end> on the
screen and push the [INS] key.

e.g.2) To add a subprogram


1. Move the cursor to “Subprogram No.” or <Sub program end> and push the [INS] key.
2. Input the subprogram number you want to add.
3. Sequentially input the subprogram contents following to the screen questions.

2018/03/28 2 - 162 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

e.g.3) To add a workpieces


Suppose you want to add a workpiece more to the currently existing four workpiece in the
table up.

1. There are currently four workpieces as follows:

2 1
4 3

2. Put one more workpiece. Use this as workpiece number No. 3.

Added workpiece
3 2 1 The previous 3 is automatically
2
5 4 changed to 4.

3. Move the cursor to Workpieces NO. 03 X.

4. Push the [INS] key.

5. Input correct coordinates of the Workpiece No. 3 and push the [ENT] key.
The coordinates of the newly inserted workpiece number are automatically input as the
initial value (X: 0.000, Y: 0.000).

2018/03/28 2 - 163 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

2.7.3 [DEL] (deletion) key


This key is used to delete an already set program, job, subprogram or workpieces from the
program.

e.g.1) To delete a job


1. Move the cursor to the job ( Job XX) you wan to delete using the [F3] (search),
[PAGE], or [CURSOR] key and push the [DEL] key.
2. The job number after the deleted job is automatically updated by one and indicated.

e.g.2) To delete a subprogram


2 1. Move the cursor to the subprogram number ( No.) you want to delete using the [F3]
(search), [PAGE], or [CURSOR] key and push the [DEL] key.

e.g.3) To delete a workpieces.


1. Move the cursor to “ X” of the Workpieces. you want to delete using the [PAGE] or
[CURSOR] key and push the [DEL] key.
2. The workpiece number after the deleted workpiece is automatically updated by one and
indicated.

2.7.4 [F6] (Copy job) / [F7] (Paste job)


The content of a job stored in a memory is copied by the [F6] key (Copy job) and inserted by the
[F7] key (Paste job).

Ex 1) To copy the content of Job 02 (Tap) and insert the same tap job after Job 03
1. Move the cursor to the job ( Job 02 Tap) you want to copy by using the [F3] (search)
key, [PAGE ∧] key, [PAGE ∨] key, [CURSOR ] key, or [CURSOR ] key.
2. Push the [F6] (Copy job) key. The content of the Job 02 (Tap) is stored in the memory
for copies.
3. Move the cursor to the place ( Job 04) you want to insert the same content.

2018/03/28 2 - 164 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

4. Push the [F7] (Paste job).

(Note 1) It is unable to copy a subprogram by the [F6] (Copy job) key and insert it
in a main program by the [F7] (Paste job) key.
(Note 2) In addition, it is also unable to copy the job of the main program by the
[F6] (Copy job) key and insert it into the subprogram by the [F7] (Paste
job) key.
(Note 3) The content of a job stored in the memory for copies by the [F6] key is
cleared when:
a) Another job or subprogram is copied by the [F6] key. (Only the
content of the last copy remains in the memory for copies).
b) A job or subprogram is deleted by [DEL] key (the content of the
deleted job or subprogram remains in the memory for copies.)
c) Editing is finished.

2018/03/28 2 - 165 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Ex 2) To copy a subprogram No.50 to use as the Nos.52


1. Move the cursor to the place ( Job) of the subprogram you want to copy.
2. Push the [F6] (Copy job) key.

3. Move the cursor to  No. or  Subprogram end of the subprogram you want to copy
and insert.
4. Push the [INS] key, input the program number [52], and push the [ENT] key.

Push the [F7] (Paste job) key.

2018/03/28 2 - 166 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

Ex 3) By using the [F7] (Paste job) key, the content of one job can be moved to other place. Use
this function to replace the job 2 to the job 3 as follows:
e.g.)
(Current job)
• Job 1: Coolant ON •Job 1: Coolant ON
•Job 2: Tapping •Job 3: Hole
•Job 3: Hole •Job 2: Tapping
•Job 4: Coolant OFF •Job 4: Coolant OFF

1. Move the cursor to the job ( Job 03) using the [F3] (search) key, [PAGE ∧] key,
[PAGE ∨] key, [CURSOR ] key, or [CURSOR ] key and push the [DEL] key. 2
The content of the deleted job 03 (hole) is memorized in the memory for copies.

Job travel is available only one by one.


If two jobs are tried to be deleted, note that only the last job can be copied by the [F7]
key.

2. Move the job 03 and insert it to the job 02 using the [F3] (search), [PAGE], or
[CURSOR] key.

The copied job or subprogram in the memory is not cleared unless the machine power
is turned OFF, so it can be copied or inserted to other programs.

2018/03/28 2 - 167 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 2 Machining data

3. Push the [F7] (Paste job) key.

The job 03 (hole) copied in the memory is inserted as a new job 02. The old job 02
(tap) is moved to the new job 03.

2018/03/28 2 - 168 eCOM3COPR2-6.doc


Chapter 3 Schedule program

CHAPTER 3
3

SCHEDULE PROGRAM

3.1 What is a Schedule Program?


3.2 Schedule Program Edit
3.3 Re-edit Schedule Program

2017/08/23 3-1 eCOM3COPR3.doc


Chapter 3 Schedule program

3.1 What is a Schedule Program?


This section explains about the roles of a schedule program.

The schedule program is to register multiple machining data in one schedule program and perform
the registered machining data (machining) sequentially as registered.
It is effective to use in the following when:
1. The number of machining jobs exceeds 99.
2. Multiple different machining orders, tool patterns, and cutting conditions for the same
machining job are needed for machining operations.
3. Multiple different workpieces are machined at one time.

(Note 1) There are capacity limits for creation, correction, or storage of a program
and creation of a folder as follows:
3 • Total capacity of memory usable is about 128 M bytes.
• Total number of files and folders including NC programs,
conversational programs, databank, and folders used is 4096 files.

2017/08/23 3-2 eCOM3COPR3.doc


Chapter 3 Schedule program

3.2 Schedule Program Edit


This section explains about the procedure to set the schedule program.
1. Invalidate the [Data protection] switch.
2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push the [1] (1. Machining data) and push the [ENT] key.
On the menu screen, you can also select a menu item by using the [CURSOR] key to move to
the desired menu number and pushing the [ENT] key.
4. Input a schedule program number and push the [ENT] key.
The program number here means the schedule program number.
The number input area is 9900-9999.
5. Input the program number and push the [ENT] key.

The program number here means the program number of the machining data.
It is also possible to register multiple program numbers of the machining data of the same
number.
The number of registerable programs is 99.

6. When the program number has been set, input [0] and push the [ENT] key.
7. Push the [F0] key to call the edit/finish mode.

2017/08/23 3-3 eCOM3COPR3.doc


Chapter 3 Schedule program

8. Select any one of the [F0] to [F7] keys and push it.
[F0] (Cancel w/ saving changes)
The edited content is registered in the memory.
[F3] (Cancel w/o saving changes)
All the edited contents are made invalid. Accordingly, they are not registered in the
memory. However, the overwritten content is still valid.
[F4] (Comment)
The comment setting mode is called.
[F6] (Overwrite save)
The contents ever edited are overwritten in a file and the screen returns to the edit
status. However, if a program in operation is edited or a program is edited during
drawing, the [F6] (Overwrite save) key is prohibited to be pushed.
[F7] (Edit mode)
The data setting mode is called again.
3 9. The [DATA PROTECTION] switch is validated.

2017/08/23 3-4 eCOM3COPR3.doc


Chapter 3 Schedule program

3.3 Re-edit Schedule Program


Before starting re-editing a schedule program, it is recommended that you confirm the enough
memory capacity remains. (This goes the same for deletion.)
If memory lacks, the <<Memory overflow>> alarm appears during editing or when editing
finishes and the edited data becomes invalid.
Here, this section explains about the procedure to re-edit (delete, insert, or change) a created
schedule program.

1. Deletion
(1) Move the cursor to the <Program No.> you want to delete.
(2) Push the [DEL] key.

2. Insertion
(1) Move the cursor to the <Program No.> you want to insert.
(2) Push the [INS] key. 3
(3) Input the <Program No.> and push the [ENT] key.

3. Change
(1) Move the cursor to the <Program No.> you want to change.
(2) Input the <Program No.> and push the [ENT] key.

2017/08/23 3-5 eCOM3COPR3.doc


Chapter 3 Schedule program

(This page was intentionally left blank.)

2017/08/23 3-6 eCOM3COPR3.doc


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

CHAPTER 4

MACHINING SEQUENCE 4

4.1 What Is Machining Sequence?


4.2 Procedure to Change Machining Sequence
4.3 Contents of Machining Sequence
4.4 Machining sequence and Coordinate System Setting
4.5 Execution of Non-cutting Jobs between Cutting Jobs

2017/08/23 4-1 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

4.1 What Is Machining Sequence?


The machining sequence is an order (sequence) to machine a workpiece mounted on the table of a
machine according to the number of workpieces mount on the table, the tools to be used, and the
commands of a program.
When a program is created, the machining sequence is automatically set to <Each tool (1 pc.) >
per program.

4.2 Procedure to Change Machining Sequence


This section explains how to change the machining sequence.
1. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.
2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push [2] and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input a program number and push the [ENT] key.
5. Select the number for the machining sequence to be changed, input the number, and push the
[ENT] key.

6. When the change is completed, push the [F0] (Completion mode) key to call the edit finish
mode. Select and push any of the function keys below.
[F0] (Cancel w/ saving changes): Edited content is stored in memory.
[F3] (Cancel w/o saving changes): All the edited contents are invalidated and not registered
in memory. However, the overwritten content is not invalidated.
[F6] (Overwrite save): Set contents are saved to continue editing.
[F7] (Edit mode): The mode to edit again becomes active.
7. Set the[DATA PROTECTION]select switch to the[ON]position.

2017/08/23 4-2 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

4.3 Contents of Machining Sequence


This section explains the machining sequence 1 to 5 indicated in the teaching data are.
Figure Description
<1. Each job (1 pc.) > Workpiece is machined piece by piece and job by
job in the order set by the machining data. In the
Example) jobs, the workpiece is machined in the order of the
Program and use tool tools used.
If there are multiple workpieces on the machine
Job No. Job name Tool No. Tool name table, the next workpiece is machined after all the
1 Hole 01 Center Drill machining jobs to the previous workpiece have
02 Drill finished.
Workpiece 1
Tap 01 Center Drill
2 02 Drill
Center drilling
by tool No. 01
03 Tap Job 1 (Hole)

Each job (1 pc.) Drilling by tool


No. 02 4
No.2 No.3
No.2 No.1
No.1
Center drilling
by tool No. 01
Job 2 (Tap)

Drilling by tool
Job 2 No. 02
Job 1

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2 Tapping by tool


No. 03

Workpiece 2
As shown above, first the
workpiece 1 is machined by tool The workpiece
No. 1 and 2 in the job 1. Center drilling
1 is completed . Job 1 (Hole) by tool No. 01
Secondly, it is machined by tool
No. 1, 2and 3 in the job 2.
Drilling by tool
Then Workpiece 2 is machined in the same procedure. No. 02

Center drilling
by tool No. 01

Job 2 (Tap) Drilling by tool


No. 02

Tapping by tool
No. 03
Tool change

2017/08/23 4-3 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Figure Description
<2. Each tool (1pc) > When workpieces are individually machined, a
tool common to the same machining job has
Example) priority. (However, the previous job used with the
Program and use tool tool must have been finished beforehand.)
If there are multiple workpieces on the machine
Job No. Job name Tool No. Tool name table, the next workpiece is machined after all the
1 Hole 01 Center drill machining jobs to the previous workpiece have
02 Drill finished.
01 Center drill Workpiece 1
2 Tap 02 Drill
03 Tap Center drilling
Job 1 (Hole) by tool No. 01
1) Center drilling (tool No. 01)
Each tool (1pc) (1)
Drilling by tool
No. 02
4 Job 2

Center drilling
Job 1 by tool No. 01
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
Job 2 (Tap)
Drilling by tool
No. 02
2) Drilling (tool No. 02)
Each tool (1 pc.) (2)
Tapping by tool
No. 03

Workpiece 2
Center drilling
Machining of
Job 1 (Hole) by tool No. 01
3) Tapping (tool No. 03) workpiece 1
Each tool (1 pc.) (3) is completed.
Drilling by tool
No. 02

Center drilling
by tool No. 01
Job 2 (Tap)
Drilling by tool
4) Workpiece 2 is machined in the same procedure. No. 02

Tapping by tool
No. 03

Tool change

2017/08/23 4-4 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Figure Description
<3. Each job > The same job common to all the workpieces
Example) mounted on the table is performed first.
Program and use tool In the same job, tools are used in the order set by
the program.
Job No. Job name Tool No. Tool name
1 Hole 01 Center drill Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
02 Drill Center
Center
01 Center drill drilling by drilling by
Job 1 (Hole)
2 Tap 02 Drill tool No. 1 tool No. 1
03 Tap

Drilling by Drilling
No.01 by
1) Center drilling (tool No. 01) tool No. 2 tool No. 2
Each job (1)

Center Center
drilling by
tool No. 1
drilling by
tool No. 1
4
Job 1 Job 1
Job 2 (Tap)

Drilling Drilling by
Workpiece Workpiece 2
No.01 by No.01
Machining of tool No. 2 tool No. 2
2) Drilling (tool No. 02) workpiece 1
Each job (2) is completed. Tapping by
Tapping by
tool No. 3 tool No. 3

Tool change

3) Center drilling again (tool No. 01)


Each job (3)

Job 2 Job2

Machining of
4) Drilling again (Tool No. 02) workpiece 2
Each job (4) is completed.

5) Tapping (tool No. 03)


Each job (5)

2017/08/23 4-5 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Figure Description
<4. Each tool (tool prioritized) > A tool common to the same machining jobs is used
Example) to all the workpieces priority to other tools.
(However, the previous job used with the tool must
Job No. Job name Tool No. Tool name have been finished beforehand.)
1 Hole 01 Center drill If a tool common to all other workpieces set on the
02 Drill machine table, it is used for all the workpieces
01 Center drill
first. (However, the previous job used with the tool
must have been finished beforehand.)
2 Tap 02 Drill
Workpiece 1
03 Tap
Workpiece 2
Center drilling Center drilling
by tool No. 1 by tool No. 1
1) Center drilling (tool No. 01)
Each tool (tool prioritized) (1)
Job 1
(Hole) Drilling by
Drilling by tool No. 2
4 Job 2 Job2
tool No. 2

Job 1 Job 1
Center drilling Center drilling
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2 by tool No. 1
by tool No. 1
2) Drilling (tool No. 02)
Each tool (tool prioritized) (2) Job 2
(Tap)
Drilling by tool
No. 2 Drilling by
tool No. 2

Tapping by Tapping by
tool No. 3 tool No. 3
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

Tool change
3) Tapping (tool No. 03)
Each tool (tool prioritized)(3)

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

2017/08/23 4-6 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Figure Description
<5. Each tool (coordinate sys. prioritized) > If a program has coordinate system setting jobs, all
Example) the workpieces are machined according to "4. Each
Program and use tool (coordinate system setting) tool (tool priority)” in the current coordinate
Job No. Job name Tool No. Tool name system and the next machining in the next
1 Hole 01 Center drill coordinate system follows.
02 Drill
01 Center drill
2 Tap 02 Drill Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
03 Tap
Coordinate * * Center
3 system setting Center
drilling by
4 Hole 01 Center drill Job 1 drilling by tool No. 01
02 Drill (Hole) tool No. 01
Drilling by
To add job 3 Coordinate system setting and job 4 Hole Drilling by tool No.
Each tool (coordinate sys. priority) (1) tool No. 02 02
New coordinates New coordinates
Job 2 Job 2 Center
4
drilling by Center
tool No. 01 drilling by
tool No. 01
Job 1 Job 4 Job 1 Job 4
Job 2
(Tap) Drilling by
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
tool No. 02 Drilling
by tool
1) to 3) Same as those in “4. Each tool (coordinate sys. No. 02
priority)”
4) A new coordinate system is established. Tapping by Tapping by
Each tool (coordinate sys. priority) (2) tool No. 03 tool No. 03
New coordinates Old coordinates Job 3
(Coordinate
system setting)
Center
Center
Job 4 drilling by drilling by
(Hole) tool No. 01 tool No. 01
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

Drilling by Drilling by
5) Center drilling (tool No. 01)
tool No. 02 tool No. 02
Each tool (coordinate sys. priority) (3)
Tool change

Change of coordinate system

6) Drilling (tool No. 02)


Each tool (coordinate sys. priority) (4)

2017/08/23 4-7 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

4.4 Machining sequence and Coordinate System


Setting
This section explains about the examples of machining sequences when a program contains a
coordinate system setting command. The examples of operations are as follows:

Example of machining data containing a coordinate system setting


Job No. Job name Tool No. Tool name
01 Center drill
1 Hole
02 Drill
01 Center drill
2 Tap 02 Drill
03 Tap
3 Coordinate system setting - -
01 Center drill
4 Hole
02 Drill

4 Example 1: Machining sequence 1 (Each job) (1 pc.)

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
Job 1 Center drilling by Center drilling by
(Hole) tool No. 01 tool No. 01

Drilling by tool Drilling by tool


No. 02 No. 02

Center drilling by Center drilling by


tool No. 01 tool No. 01
Job 2
(Tap)
Drilling by tool Drilling by tool
No. 02 No. 02

Tapping by Tapping by
Job 3 tool No. 03 tool No. 03
(Coordinate
system setting)

Center drilling by Center drilling by


tool No. 01 tool No. 01
Job 4
(Hole)
Drilling by tool Drilling by tool
No. 02 No. 02

Tool change

Change of coordinate system

2017/08/23 4-8 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Example 2: Machining sequence 2 (Each tool) (1 pc.)

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
Job 1 Center drilling Center drilling
(Hole) by tool No. 01 by tool No. 01

Drilling by tool
No. 02 Drilling by tool
No. 02

Center drilling
Center drilling
by tool No. 01
by tool No. 01
Job 2
(Tap)
Drilling by tool Drilling by tool
No. 02 No. 02 4
Tapping by tool Tapping by tool
Job 3 No. 03 No. 03
(Coordinate
system setting)

Center drilling Center drilling


by tool No. 01 by tool No. 01
Job 4
(Hole)
Drilling by tool Drilling by tool
No. 02 No. 02

Tool change

Change of coordinate system

2017/08/23 4-9 eCOM3COPR4


Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Example 3: Machining sequence 3 (Each job)

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
Job 1 Center drilling Center drilling
(Hole) by tool No. 01 by tool No. 01

Drilling by tool Drilling by tool


No. 02 No. 02

Center drilling Center drilling


by tool No. 01 by tool No. 01
Job 2
(Tap)
Drilling by tool Drilling by tool
No. 02 No. 02
4
Tapping by tool
Tapping by tool No. 03
Job 3 No. 03
(Coordinate
system setting)

Center drilling
Center drilling by tool No. 01
by tool No. 01
Job 4
(Hole) Drilling by tool
Drilling by tool No. 02
No. 02

Tool change

Change of coordinate system

2017/08/23 4 - 10 eCOM3COPR4
Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Example 4: Machining sequence 4 (Each tool) (tool priority)

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
Job 1 Center drilling Center drilling
(Hole) by tool No. 01 by tool No. 01

Drilling by tool Drilling by tool


No. 02 No. 02

Center drilling Center drilling


by tool No. 01 by tool No. 01
Job 2
(Tap)
Drilling by tool Drilling by tool
No. 02 No. 02 4

Tapping by tool Tapping by tool


Job 3 No. 03
(Coordinate No. 03
system setting)

Center drilling
by tool No. 01 Center drilling
Job 4 by tool No. 01
(Hole)
Drilling by tool
No. 02 Drilling by tool
No. 02

Tool change

Change of coordinate system

Machining sequence 5: Each tool (coordinate system priority) is the same as for “4.2 Contents of
Machining sequence”.

2017/08/23 4 - 11 eCOM3COPR4
Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

4.5 Execution of Non-cutting Jobs between Cutting


Jobs
This section explains machining sequences of a program that contains a non-cutting job.

4.5.1 Program (job) flow


Non-cutting job

Cutting job

Cutting job

Be fully aware that execution order of the non-cutting jobs depends on the setting content of the
machining sequence.

4 4.5.2 Classification of cutting jobs and non-cutting jobs


Classification of cutting jobs and non-cutting jobs
Cutting job Non-cutting job
Job No. Job No.
1. Center hole 9. Coolant
2. Hole 10. Axis travel
3. Tap 11. Signal output
4. Reamer 13. Program stop
5. Counter boring hole 14. Coordinate system setting
6. Counter boring tap
7. Counter boring reamer
8. Milling
15. Rolled tap
16. Counter boring rolled tap
17. Motion call
18. Facing
19. Pocket milling
20. Contouring
21. Chamfering

4.5.3 Example of execution of non-cutting jobs


This section explains the machining sequences of signal output jobs when two workpieces are
machined in different machining sequences specified with the following machining data:

Job No. Job name Tool No. Tool name


01 Center drill
1 Hole
02 Drill
2 Signal output * *
01 Center drill
3 Tap 02 Drill
03 Tap

2017/08/23 4 - 12 eCOM3COPR4
Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Machining sequence 1: Each job (1pc)

Example of execution of non-cutting job: Each job (1 pc.)

No.2
No.1

Job 2

Job 1 2. Output of workpiece 1 signal

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
No.2 No.3
1. Job 1 to workpiece 1 No.1

Job 3

No.2 3. Job 3 to workpiece 1


No.1
completes.
Machining to workpiece 1
completes.

Job 1 Job 2

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

4. Job 1 to workpiece 2 5. Workpiece 2 signal is output

No.2 No.3
No.1

Job 3

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

6. Job 3 to workpiece 2 completes.


All machining jobs finish.

2017/08/23 4 - 13 eCOM3COPR4
Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Machining sequence 2: Each tool (1 pc.)

Example of non-cutting job: Each tool (1 pc.)


No.1
No.2

Job 1
Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2 Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
1. Center drilling 2 places of 2. Drilling 2 places of workpieces 1.
workpiece 1 All jobs to workpiece 1 finish.

4 No.3

Job 3 Job 2

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2
4. Tapping process 3 to workpiece 1 finishes. 3. Workpiece 1 signal outputs
All jobs to workpiece1 finish.

No.2
No.1

Job 1

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2 Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2


5. Center drilling 2 places of 6. Drilling 2 places of workpiece 2.
workpiece 2 All jobs to workpiece 2 finish.

No.3 Job2

Job 3
7. Workpiece 2 signal
8. Tapping process 3 to workpiece 2 finishes. outputs.
All jobs finish.

2017/08/23 4 - 14 eCOM3COPR4
Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Machining sequence 3: Each job

Example of execution of non-cutting job: Each job


No.1 No.2

Job 1 Job 1

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2 Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2


1. Center drilling of workpieces 1 & 2 2. Drilling of workpieces 1 & 2 in job 1
in job 1 Job 1 to workpieces 1 & 2 finishes.

No.1
4

Job 2

4. Center drilling of workpieces 1 & 2 3. Signal is output


in job 3

No.2
No.3

Job 3 Job 3

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

5. Drilling of workpieces 1 & 2 6. Tapping of workpieces 1 & 2 in job 3


in job 1 All machining processes finish.

2017/08/23 4 - 15 eCOM3COPR4
Chapter 4 Machining Sequence

Machining sequence 4: Each tool (tool priority)


Machining sequence 5: Each tool (coordinate system priority)

Example of execution of non-cutting job: Each tool (tool priority), Each tool (coordinate system
priority)

No.1 No.2

Job 1 Job 1

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2 Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2


1. Center drilling the required places 2. Drilling the required places of
of workpieces 1 & 2 in jobs 1 & 3 workpieces 1 & 2 in jobs 1 & 3
4
No.3

Job 3 Job 3
Job2

4. Tapping the required places of 3. Job 2 signal is output.


workpieces 1 & 2 in processes 3
All machining jobs finish.

4.5.4 Editing in operation


The machining sequences changed during operation is reflected to the next operation.

2017/08/23 4 - 16 eCOM3COPR4
Chapter 5 Tool pattern

CHAPTER 5

TOOL PATTERNS
5
5.1 Tool Patterns
5.2 How to Change Tool Patterns
5.3. Editing during Operation

2013/09/11 5-1 eCOM3COPR5.doc


Chapter 5 Tool pattern

5.1 Tool Patterns


Each tool pattern has a tool type and order registered per cutting job.

If the tool pattern registered in the databank is changed, it can be used when programming.
In addition, if you change the tool pattern after progrmming, you can use it in a program as a
special tool pattern.

The tool pattern is set for a cutting job.

If the tool pattern initially set in the databank is enough for your machining, this procedure is
unnecesary.
The tool pattern is automatically applied in programming.

2013/09/11 5-2 eCOM3COPR5.doc


Chapter 5 Tool pattern

5.2 How to Change Tool Patterns


1. Invalid the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.
2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push [3] and then key push the [ENT] key.
Or you can select a desired item from the menu on the menu screen by moving the cursor key
to the desired menu number and pushing the [ENT] key.
4. Input the program number of the tool pattern you want to edit and push the [ENT] key.

When the program number is input, the register content is indicated per cutting job.
(1) If any of the tool patterns is changed and dedicated for a program, the screen indicates
“****” at the upper part of the screen.
(2) If you want to return the tool pattern dedicated for a program to a tool pattern registered in
the databank, push [C], [L], and [R] and push the [ENT] key.
The indication “****” disappears from the screen. The tool pattern is updated in the
databank.

5. Change the tool pattern according to the tool pattern change procedure of the databank.
6. When the change is finished, push the [F0] key (Completion mode) to finish the edit mode.
7. Select any ky from [F0] - [F7] and push it.
[F0] (Cancel w/ saving changes) : Set contents are registered in memory.
[F3] (Cancel w/o saving changes) : All the set contents are invalidated.
They are not registered in memory.
However, the overwriten and saved
contents remain valid.
[F6] (Overwrite save) : Set contents are saved to continue editing.
[F7] (Edit mode) : This calls the mode to set data again.
8. Validate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.

2013/09/11 5-3 eCOM3COPR5.doc


Chapter 5 Tool pattern

5.3 Editing during Operation


If you try to change a tool pattern of a program during operation, the operator message <<Asign
tools>> appears and the tool asignment information is deleted.

However, the contents changed in the current operation program are not reflectde but the operation
continue as is. The alarm <<No tools assigned>> is triggered after operation ends.

2013/09/11 5-4 eCOM3COPR5.doc


Chapter 6 Cutting conditions

CHAPTER 6

CUTTING CONDITIONS

6.1 Cutting Conditions


6.2 How to Change Cutting Conditions 6
6.3 Editing during Operation

2017/08/23 6-1 eCOM3COPR6.doc


Chapter 6 Cutting conditions

6.1 Cutting Conditions


When machining data is newly created, the cutting condition in the databank is linked to the
machining data as a cutting condition dedicated for the program when editing finishes.
So, even if a cutting condition in the databank is change thereafter, it cannot be reflected to the
cutting condition in the machining data and is not reflected in machining. If you want to change a
cutting condition in the machining data, change the the cutting condition linke to the machining
data in the following operation:

Cutting conditions include conditions other than tool type names, tool cutting conditions, tool stop
position before a workpiece, cutting dimentions after through hole, reaming finish margin, and
others.

If the tool pattern initially set in the databank is enough for your machining, this procedure is
unnecesary.
The tool pattern is automatically applied in programming.

2017/08/23 6-2 eCOM3COPR6.doc


Chapter 6 Cutting conditions

6.2 How to Change Cutting Conditions


1. Invalid the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.
2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push [4] and then push the [ENT] key.
It is also possible to select a menu item from the menu by pointing the cursor at the desired
menu number on the menu screen and pushing the [ENT] key.
4. Input the program number to change cutting conditions and push the [ENT] key.

If you want to return a cutting conditions dedicated for a program to the cutting condition for a
6
material registed in the databank, push [C], [L], and [R] and push the [ENT] key on the
cutting condition data edit screen.
However, all the cutting conditions are returned to the originally specified material conditions.
So, for example, if this operation is done for the cutting condition 1, the cutting conditions 2
and 3 are also returned to the cutting conditions in the databank.

5. The required changes are carried out in accordance with the procedure for changing the cutting
conditions in the data bank.
Refer to “Chapter 2 - 2.12 Cutting Conditions (Conversation Language)” in the Operation
Manual (Data) for further details.
6. After the changes finish, push the [F0] (Completion mode) key to call the edit finish mode
7. Select any one of [F0] to [F7] and push it.
[F0] (Cancel w/saving changes) :Set contents are registered in memory.
[F3] (Cancel w/o saving changes):All the set contents are invalidated. They are not registered
in memory. However, the overwriten and saved contents
remain valid.
[F6] (Overwrite save) :Set contents are saved to continue editing.
[F7] (Edit mode) :This calls the mode to set data again.
8. Validate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.

2017/08/23 6-3 eCOM3COPR6.doc


Chapter 6 Cutting conditions

6.3 Editing during Operation


The cutting conditions changed during program operation are reflected in the next operation.

2017/08/23 6-4 eCOM3COPR6.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

CHAPTER 7

OPERATION PREPARATION

7.1 Procedure to Edit Operation preparation


7.2 Procedure to Tool assignment
7.3 Procedure to Re-assign Tools
7.4 Tool Assignment during Operation 7
7.5 Compensation of Cutting Position
7.6 Workpiece Height Compensation
7.7 Setting of Tool Change Positioning

2017/08/23 7-1 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

This section explains about the procedure to prepare for operation of four types necessary for
starting operation of created machining data.
The four types of operation preparation are as follows:

1. Tool assignment: The tools uses are selected and the intersection where the
[?] key is pushed in a contouring or chamfering job is
calculated.
2. Cutting position compensation: Fine compensation amount of a cutting position is set.
3. Workpiece height compensation: Height variations of multiple workpieces are compensated.
4. Tool change position: Tool return height and X/Y positions are set when tools are
changed. This is effective for a machine model whose
magazine works together with the Z-axis travel. This is not
indicated for other machine models.

7.1 Procedure to Edit Operation preparation


1. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.
2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push [5] and push the [ENT] key.
It is also possible to select a menu item from the menu by pointing the cursor at the desired
menu number on the menu screen and pushing the [ENT] key.
4. Input the program number and push the [ENT] key.

2017/08/23 7-2 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.2 Procedure to Tool assignment


This section explains the procedures to automatically select already set machining data, tool list,
predrill diameter for tapping, tool pattern, cutting conditions, and tools to be used from the tool list
of the databank and to automatically calculate the coordinate position, cutting length, arc center,
arc radius, or angle of a contouring or chamfering job when the [?] key is pushed.

7.2.1 Procedure for assignment


1. Push [1] and push the [ENT] key on the preparation operation menu screen.

2. Push the [F7] (Assign tools) key. Necessary tool is selected from the databank per job and the
content is indicated on the screen.
7
The lower right of the screen indicates that the tool has been assigned and the intersection of
the place where the [?] key is pushed has been calculated.
The item which does not need setting is indicated with ** and the cursor skip it.

2017/08/23 7-3 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

3 .Set necessary compensations, miscellaneous functions, and dwellings or change or delete a


tool in need.
[F0] (Completion editing) : The edit finish mode is called up.
[F1] (Previous tool) : The cursor is moved to the previous tool.
[F2] (Next tool) : The cursor is moved to the next tool.
[F3] (Change function) : Machining functions can be changed. For details, refer to
"7.2.6 To change machining functions.”
[F4] (Calculation result) : The place where the [?] key was pushed but no intersection
was calculated is indicated.
[F5] (Search) : You can search a job, tool, tool in a subprogram, tool in a
current job, or unassigned tool.
[F6] (Tool check) : A tool use is checked. For details, refer to “7.2.7 Tool check.”
[F7] (Assign tools) : Tools are assigned. For details, refer to “7.2.4 To select a
necessary tool.”

4. [F0] (Completion mode) : When this key is pushed, the edit finish mode is called up.

5. [F0] - [F7] : Push any one of the keys.


[F0] : Set contents are registered in memory to finish editing.
[F3] : The set contents are invalidated. They are not registered in memory.
[F7] : This calls the mode to set data again.

6. Validate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.

2017/08/23 7-4 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.2.2 If the place where the [?] key is pushed is not


calculated
If the place where the [?] key is pushed but no intersection is not calculated in a contouring or
chamfering job, an alarm message appears on the screen as follows:

1. Push the [F4] (calculation result) key.

2. Check the uncalculated connection number and correct the machining data.

The search function is convenient to use; push the keys as follows:


• To search a job search: [Job] [F5] (Search)
• To search a job and tool: [Job] [/] [Tool] [F5] (Search)
• To search a tool in a current job: [/] [Tool] [F5] (Search)
• To search a tool in a subprogram: [-] [Subprogram number] [/] [Tool]
[F5] (Search)
• To search an unassigned tool: Only [F5] (search) key to search an item below
the cursor
(Note 1) The tool used here is the order of the tools used in the job but is not the
tool list number.
(Note 2) After the search, the searched job or tool is indicated at the head of the
screen. The cursor is at the tool position.

2017/08/23 7-5 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.2.3 Tool assignment screen and contents of information


Tool assignment screen
This appears when all These are items that
This appears when tool the values input by “?”
assignment completes. need no setting. The
are calculated. cursor skips them.

Tool assignment information


7 2 Hole Tool No.3 Drill 3.000
Tool name
Tool list No.
Machining function
Machining function No.

2017/08/23 7-6 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

Table 7-1 Contents of tool assignment information


Machining The number of the machining function in a job is indicated.
function The example of the screen on the previous page means that the holing job of
number the job 01 is the second machining function.
Machining The machining functions are as follows:
function 1. Center hole: To drill a center hole
2. Chamfering: To chamfer a hole
3. Holing: To open a hole
4. Tapping: To tap
5. Reaming: To ream
6. Counter boring: To counterbore
7. Top facing: To endmill a top face
8. Hole semifinishing: To semifinish a hole before final finishing
9. Milling R: To rough with an endmill
10. Milling F: To finish with an endmill
11. Chamfering mill: To chamfer and mill
Tool list The tool list number of a select tool is indicated.
number Example Content
( indicates a 40 This is a tool number automatically selected from the databank.
blank.) *40 This shows a forcibly assigned (or changed) tool or a one whose
function is converted.
 This shows a tool that is not registered in the databank.
 This shows a tool whose machining function is complexly used
together with the previous function.

* This shows a tool whose machining function is complexly used


together with the previous function but is forcibly assigned or a
one whose function is changed.
*** This shows a tool whose machining function is deleted.
Tool name This shows a name or part of size of a selected tool.

2017/08/23 7-7 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.2.4 To select a necessary tool


The machining data set in a program and the tool list set in the databank are referred each other so
that necessary tools can be automatically selected and assigned.

1. Tools are selected from the tool list in the order from a small number. If two or more tools of
the same type have been registered, the smaller number one is first automatically selected.
2. To select a lower holing tool for a tapping job (Counter boring tap job)
The tap size input in the machining data is referred to the drill diameter for tapping in the
databank and a corresponding one is selected.
For a rolled tap (Counter boring rolled tap) job, the rolled tap item is compared with the drill
diameter for a drilling depth and selected.
3. To select a lower holing tool for reaming
• Drilling depth 1 (holing)
A tool is selected from the tool list based on the dimensions (final hole diameter - Reamer
finish margin 1 (cutting condition)) of the outside diameter.
• Drilling depth 2 (hole semifinishing)
A tool is selected from the tool list based on the dimensions (final hole diameter - Reamer
finish margin 2 (cutting condition)) of the outside diameter.
4. Example (1) of a tapping job having two lower holing tools
The tool pattern is set as shown on the screen below.
The outside diameter of the second hole functional tool is obtained from the predrill diameter
for tapping and the tool is automatically selected. So, the first hole functional tool must
forcibly assigned without fail.

(Tool assignment): M5.0 × P0.8 predrill diameter for tapping = 4.3

Tool that must be


forcibly assigned

This is
automatically
selected from the
databank.

2017/08/23 7-8 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

5. When there are two lower holing tools in a tapping job and the drilling depth function is
reaming a hole.

The tool pattern is set as shown on the above screen.


Reamer diameter is gained from a tap drilling depth diameter. The drill diameter is obtained from
the following formula:
[Predrill diameter for tapping - Reamer finish margin 2 (cutting condition)]

7.2.5 Forcible assignment


Forcible assignment is to forcibly change or delete a tool that is automatically selected from the
databank for a machining reason.
As for a forcible assigned tool, check the tool and make sure that the selected tool is correct
without fail.
7
1. To change tools used
(1) Move the cursor to the position of the tool to be changed by using the [F5] (search),
[PAGE ∨], [PAGE ∧], [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.
(2) Input the tool list number to be changed and push the [ENT] key.

An asterisk () (change mark) is indicated before the changed tool list number.
Refer to “7.2.7 Tool check.”
The forcibly assigned tool loses all the previously set data like compensation, miscellaneous
functions, and dwelling, so set them again in need.

2017/08/23 7-9 eCOM3COPR7.doc


Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

Tool types selectable for machining functions


Machining function Tools
Center drill, *Drill, *Drill with chamfering tool, *Drill with counter
Center hole
boring tool, *Drill tap, *Drill reamer, *Carbide drill
Drill, Drill with chamfering tool, Drill with counter boring tool,
Hole Drill tap, Drill reamer, Carbide drill, End mill(rough), End
mill(finish), Carbide end mill(rough), Carbide end mill(finish)
Chamfering tool, Corner rounding cutter, *Center drill, *Drill,
Chamfering *Drill with chamfering tool, *Drill with counter boring tool, *Drill
tap, *Drill reamer, *Carbide drill
Tapping Spiral tap, Point tap, Hand tap , Rolled tap
Reaming, *End mill(rough), *End mill(finish), *Carbide end
Reaming
mill(rough), *Carbide end mill(finish)
Counter boring tool, End mill(rough), End mill(finish), Carbide end
Counter boring
mill(rough), Carbide end mill(finish)
End mill(rough), End mill(finish), Carbide end mill(rough), Carbide
Milling
end mill(finish)
Drill, Drill with chamfering tool, Drill with counter boring tool,
Finishing Drill tap, Drill reamer, Carbide drill, End mill(rough), End
mill(finish), Carbide end mill(rough), Carbide end mill(finish)
End mill(rough), End mill(finish), Carbide end mill(rough), Carbide
Milling(rough)
end mill(finish)
End mill(rough), End mill(finish), Carbide end mill(rough), Carbide
Milling(finish)
end mill(finish)
Corner rounding cutter Corner rounding cutter, *Center drill
Center hole+Chamfering Center drill
Hole+Chamfering Drill with chamfering tool
Hole+Counter boring Drill with counter boring tool
Hole+Tapping Drill tap
7 Hole+Reaming Drill reamer
The tool with * can be set only by forcible assignment.

2. Method for clearing the tool being used


(1) Move the cursor to the position of the tool to be changed by using the [F5] (search),
[PAGE ∨], [PAGE ∧], [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.
(2) Push the [DEL] key.

An asterisk () (change mark) is indicated before the deleted tool list number. The tool list
number is indicated like “” as shown above.
The asterisk () (change mark) is indicated before each of “Tool length offset”, “Cutter
compensation”, “Misc.func.before cutting”, “Misc.func.after cutting”, and “Dwelling time” and
the cursor skip them.

2017/08/23 7 - 10 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.2.6 Change machining functions


You can replace a machining function order with others in the same job.

1. Move the cursor to the position of the tool to be checked using the [F5] (search), [PAGE ∨],
[PAGE ∧], [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.
2. Input the machining function number to be changed and push the [F3] key.
An asterisk () (change mark) is indicated before the tool list number of the changed
machining function.

3. Forcibly assign a tool in need.


You can replace a machining function order with others in the same job.
(1) Check the tool whose functions are changed and make sure that the settings are correct 7
without fail.
(2) As the machining function change operation has no tool change, added information
remains the same as is.

2017/08/23 7 - 11 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.2.7 Tool check


Main tool check items are as follows:

1. Whether the machining shape set in the machining data can be machined by the selected tool
or not.
2. The Z-axis position relationship is correct or not. (Whether the tool used for machining
interferes with the table or not.)
3. Whether the tool has a service life or not.

When a tool is set by forcible assignment or change of machining functions, check that the
specified tool works correctly.

1. Move the cursor to the tool to be checked using the [F5] (search), [PAGE ∨], [PAGE ∧],
[CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.
2. Push the [F6] (tool check) key.
3. If the specified tool is not usable, an alarm message indicating which tool dimension is
incorrect appears.

If the specified tool is usable, the message “Tool dimension OK” is indicate at the lower right of
the screen.
Tool check is carried out to the tool pointed by the cursor.

7.2.8 Input for Tool length offset / Cutter compensation


You can set a fine amount of tool length or cutter compensation at the specified cutting position.
Preregister a compensation amount to the compensation number on the [Cutting position
compensation] screen so that the compensation number can be specified for compensation.
For details, refer to “7.5 Compensation of Cutting Position.”

2017/08/23 7 - 12 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.2.9 Setting of the miscellaneous functions before


cutting / after cutting
This section explains about the procedure to set miscellaneous functions.

1. Move the cursor to “Misc. func. before cutting” or “Misc. func. after cutting” of the tool to be
set using the [F5] (search), [PAGE ∨], [PAGE ∧], [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.
“Before cutting” means that the X/Y movement has been finished before starting machining
with the tool.
“After cutting” means that a return between jobs has been finished after the machining with
the tool finishes.
2. Input a desired miscellaneous function code and push the [ENT] key.
For miscellaneous function codes, refer to “2.5.5 Miscellaneous function list for motion
calls.”
3. Push the [F0] (Completion mode) key to call up the edit finish mode.
4. Push any of the keys [F0] - [F7].
[F0]: This registers the set content in memory.
[F3]: This invalidates the set content. The set content is not registered in memory.
[F7]: This calls up the mode to set data again.
5. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.

The above screen shows an example of a drill in the job 01 (2. Hole function) set as follows:
Miscellaneous function before cutting: 8: Coolant ON
Miscellaneous function after cutting: 9: Coolant OFF

It is unable to set miscellaneous functions in the motion call job.


(Setting items are not indicated.)

7.2.10 Dwell Setting


This section explains about the dwell time setting procedure.

• Dwelling in drilling
The tool dwells at the lowest point of cutting set with a dwelling time. This method is applied
to the holing operation in a top-facing job.

• Dwelling in milling
The tool dwells after any cutting motion except a pocketing job. With respect to pocketing, the
tool dwells at every part on the most peripheral line before every cutting motion.

2017/08/23 7 - 13 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

Dwell in a Pocket milling

Dwelling positions

1. Move the cursor to “Time” for the tool to dwell using the [F5] (search), [PAGE ∨], [PAGE
∧], [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.
2. Input a dwelling time and push the [ENT] key.
Setting range is 0 to 99 ( 0.1 s).

The above screen indicates that the tool dwells for 0.5 s (5  0.1 = 0.5) at the lowest cutting
point in the holing job 01 (2. Hole function) with a drill.
This dwelling set on the tool assignment screen is used prior to the cutting condition
“Dwelling (chamfering)” or “Dwelling (counterboring)” set in the databank.
Setting of dwelling in the motion call job is unable, so set it by the command in the motion
call job.

3. Push the [F0] (finish mode) key to call the edit finish mode.
4. Push any of the keys [F0] - [F7].
[F0]: This registers the set content in memory.
[F3]: This invalidates the set content. The set content is not registered in memory.
[F7]: This calls up the mode to set data again.
5. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.

2017/08/23 7 - 14 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.3 Procedure to Re-assign Tools


This section explains the procedure to reassign tools.
Tool reassignment is necessary when machining data are changed, tool data are changed,
machining functions are changed, or tool conditions are changed.

Be sure to reassign tools in the following cases:


1. When a tool is forcibly assigned or functions are changed
2. When a job is inserted to or deleted from machining data
3. When assignment data is newly created
(When other tool is used or a tool list or tool pattern is changed)

7.3.1 When a tool is forcibly assigned or functions are


changed
1. The screen below shows that a drill (tool list number *36) in the holing function is forcibly
assigned. A message is indicated at the lower right of the screen.

2. Push the [F7] (Assign tools) key.


3. The tool is reassigned and the message <Tool assignment is completed.>< ? calculation was
performed> is indicated at the lower right of the screen.

The tool attached with an asterisk * (change mark) by forcible assignment or function change
is unconditionally assigned, so be sure to check the tool by the [F6] (tool check) key.

2017/08/23 7 - 15 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.3.2 When a job is inserted to or deleted from machining


data

1. Push the [F7] (Assign tools) key.


A tool is newly assigned to a newly inserted job.
A message is indicated at the lower right of the screen as shown.

• When tools are changed by tool assignment or setting change, all the collateral
information (compensation, tool length, or mode before/after cutting) about the previous
tool is cleared. This goes the same as for the same tool used before.
• With respect to a change of machining functions by the [F3] (Change function) key, tools
are not changed, so the collateral information remains the same as is.

2017/08/23 7 - 16 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.3.3 When assignment data is newly created


1. Procedure to newly create tool assignment data when an already assigned tool is cancelled and
other tool is used due to a reason for machining or the like.

Input [-9999] and push the [F7] (Assign tools) key. A new tool is assigned.

Here, all the data for cutting position compensation, miscellaneous functions, and dwelling are
not set. Set them in need.

2017/08/23 7 - 17 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

2. Procedure to leave the contents set for cutting position compensation, miscellaneous functions,
or dwelling when tool lists or tool patterns in the databank are changed
There are two methods depending on usage.
(1) To assign a tool while checking the tool because tool patterns or tools used have been
changed
Assign the tool while checking the tool in manual operation

(2) To compensate tool information (tool length or the like) because a tool have been worn in a
production process (To use an unchanged tool)
Let the tool be automatically assigned in memory operation before the program is
operated.

The following are the setting methods:


(1) Method to assign the tool in manual operation while checking the tool
(i) Input [-9998] and push the [F7] (Assign tools) key.

With respect to cutting position compensation, miscellaneous functions, or dwelling, the previous
data is used as is unless tool patterns are changed.

2017/08/23 7 - 18 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

Priority order of –9998 assignment


(1) The previously assigned tool is assigned in priority.
(2) If the tool cannot be assignee or set (or when tools are added or tool patterns are change) in
(1). The currently assigned tool (currently processing -9998 tool) is assigned in priority.
However, unfunctional tools are not assigned.
(3) If (2) is unavailable, the tool is sequentially searched from the tool list number 01 and
assigned.

(2) Method to assign the tool in automatic program operation is operated in memory
operation
i) Let the user parameter <Assign tools when starting memory operation> to<1: Yes>.
ii) Start operation of the program by start/outside start in the memory operation mode.
iii) If tool reassignment is necessary, the tool is automatically assigned. The operator message
<<Tool assignment is being carried out.>> is indicated.

The content of the tool assignment is the same as for the previously explained [-9998 tool
assignment].
(If tool reassignment is unnecessary, the program does not assign the tool but starts operation.)

The following are the examples that require tool reassignment:


• When tool list data(*) is edited in operation preparation after tool assignment
(*: Except initial life, tool life warning, and tool life.)
• When machining zero point or return height between jobs is changed in program edit
• When Z-axis height, return height, or return is changed in program edit
• When machining zero point or measurement position is read or an additional axis is
moved by selection of a coordinates system in program edit

In a schedule program, registered program numbers are read and operated one by one. Here,
whenever program numbers are read, the program decides whether tool reassignment is
necessary or not so that tool assignment is automatically done.
7
Examples of loading a program:
• The program is loaded before memory operation when tool list data is updated after tool
assignment.
• The program is loaded before memory operation when tool list data is updated after tool
assignment if a program different from the currently loaded program is executed under the
conditions of a program selection signal set and machining started by the start/outside
start switch
• The program is loaded at the reservation time of memory operation when a program
different from the currently loaded program is executed under the conditions of a program
selection signal set and machining started by the start/outside start switch
• The program is loaded when a program different from the currently loaded program is
executed after the program number is specified by communication and machining is
started by the start/outside start switch.
• The program is loaded when the start point is set and machining starts during program
operation.
• The program is loaded when the user parameter “Pallet 1 (2) program number” is
registered, the pallet selection signal 1, 2, or 1-2 is output by an outside switch, and a
program different from the currently loaded program is executed.
(For “1-2”, two registered programs are loaded.)
• For a scheduled program, the firstly performed program is loaded.
• If tool list data is updated after tools are assigned by a program, the program is loaded
before starting drawing prior to operation or before starting the program in tool path
simulation

2017/08/23 7 - 19 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

iv) After tool assignment finishes, the program is performed.

However, if an alarm appears in tool assignment, the operation is not started but the program
finishes. No tool assignment result is reflected.
• If no corresponding tool is found, the <<Tool automatic assignment error>> alarm
appears.
• If the user parameter <Check tools to be used when assigned automatically> is set<1:
Yes> and a tool different from the previously used one is assigned, <<The tool is different
from the one used before.>> alarm appears.

Here, check the tool and assign it in the edit mode.

(Note) Tool assignment is executed even when memory operation is started with
program edit prohibited.
However, tool assignment is always executed on the condition of
“Checking” regardless of the setting of <Check tools to be used when
assigned automatically> parameter.

2017/08/23 7 - 20 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.4 Tool Assignment during Operation


If you have changed tool assignments during program operation, the changed tool assignment is
reflected in the next operation.

2017/08/23 7 - 21 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.5 Compensation of Cutting Position


This section explains the procedure to set a fine amount of tool length or cutter compensation at a
specified cutting position.

The compensation of cutting position is carried out in a trial cut.

7.5.1 Position relationship of cutting position


compensation
Cutting position compensation of tool length
This becomes effective to all the Z-axis cutting feeds.
This becomes effective only to a cutting travel finish position in the Z-axis direction.
The stop position before a workpiece and the return position are unchanged.

Examples for setting:


1. Compensation amount of cutting position = 0 or unspecified
2. Compensation amount of cutting position = -1.000 (Cutting depth becomes deeper by 1 mm.)
3. Compensation amount of cutting position = 1.000 (Cutting depth becomes shallower by 1
mm.)

Cutting position compensation of tool length


Z+ 1 3
2

1.000

-1.000

2017/08/23 7 - 22 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

Cutting position compensation of tool diameter


This becomes effective when diameter compensation is set or operation is pocketing. Other than
that, “**” is indicated in the number input area of the cutting position compensation of a tool
diameter and inputting becomes unavailable.

Example when diameter compensation is set


1. Compensation amount of cutting position = 0 or unspecified
2. Compensation amount of cutting position = 1.000 (Tool periphery travels 1 mm away from a
workpiece.)
3. Compensation amount of cutting position = -1.000 (Tool periphery travels 1 mm closer to a
workpiece.)

Cutting position compensation of tool diameter 7


1.000 2
1
3

Workpiece
This examples
shows that the offset Programmed path
-1.000 direction is left

Example in pocketing

1. Compensation amount of cutting position = 0 or unspecified


2. Compensation amount of cutting position = 1.000 (Pocket diameter becomes 2 mm smaller.)
3. Compensation amount of cutting position = -1.000 (Pocket diameter becomes 2 mm larger.)

2017/08/23 7 - 23 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

Cutting position compensation of tool diameter (pocketing)

Programmed pocket radius

7
Motion call job cannot set compensation of cutting position.
In motion calls, the number input area of cutting position compensation for tool diameter/length is
not indicated.
Correct the cutting position with the command in a motion call.

2017/08/23 7 - 24 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.5.2 Procedure to set compensation amount


1. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.
2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push [5] and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input the program number you want to compensate and push the [ENT] key.
5. Push [1] on the <Operation preparation menu> screen and push the [ENT] key.
6. Move the cursor to <Tool length offset> or <Cutter compensation> you want to compensate
by using the [F5] (search) key, [PAGE ∨] key, [PAGE ∧] key, [CURSOR ] key, or
[CURSOR ] key.
7. Input the compensation number and push the [ENT] key.

The screen shows that the tool length offset number is set “1”. 7
8. Push the [F0] (Completion mode) key to call the edit finish mode.
9. Push the [F0] (To finish editing) key again to finish editing and call the <Operation
preparation menu> screen.
10. Push [2] and push the [ENT] key.

11 Input a compensation amount per compensation number and push the [ENT] key.
The setting range is from -9.999 to 9.999.
In addition, you can add or subtract a value by pushing the [F1] (Add) key.

2017/08/23 7 - 25 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

12.Push the [F0] key to call the edit finish mode.

13. Push any of the [F0] - [F7] keys.


[F0]: This registers the set content in memory.
[F3]: This invalidates the set content. The set content is not registered in memory.
[F7]: This calls up the mode to set data again.
14. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.

2017/08/23 7 - 26 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.6 Workpiece Height Compensation


This section explains the procedure to set compensation for the variation of the height when
multiple workpieces are mounted on the machine table.

1. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.


2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push [5] and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input the program number for <Workpiece height compensation> and push the [ENT] key.
5. Push [3] on the <Operation preparation menu> screen and push the [ENT] key.

6. Enter the variation of each workpiece as the standard value for the Z-axis workpiece zero, and
press the [ENT] key. (The setting range is -0.999 to 0.999 mm.) 7
In addition, after entering the numerical value, press the [F1] (Addition) key to add to or
subtract from the set value.

Workpiece height compensation method

+Z
0.05

Z-axis
workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
2
-0.05

zero 1 Workpiece
3

If the workpiece height is higher than the amount of the Z-axis workpiece zero, input the higher
amount in plus (+) amount. If it is lower, input the lower amount in minus (-) amount.
It may happen that the compensation amount varies depending on the workpiece numbers of the
machining data deleted or inserted.
With respect to all the workpiece set with this variation amount in memory operation, offset the
Z-axis variation amount with conversational absolute commands.
However, this is not for the Z-axis incremental command in a motion call job.

2017/08/23 7 - 27 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7. Push the [F0] (Completion mode) to call the edit finish mode.

8. Push any of the [F0] - [F7] keys.


[F0]: This registers the set content in memory.
[F3]: This invalidates the set content. The set content is not registered in memory.
[F7]: This calls up the mode to set data again.
9. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.

2017/08/23 7 - 28 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

7.7 Setting of Tool Change Positioning


It is possible to set a tool change position to a tool used in a program for memory operation.

1. Invalidate the [DATA PROTECTION] switch.


2. Push the [EDIT] key.
3. Push [5] and push the [ENT] key.
4. Input the program number you want to set a tool change position and push the [ENT] key.
5. Push [4] on the “Operation preparation menu” screen and push the [ENT] key.

6. Push the [F7] (Create data) key to call the <Tool change position> screen.
If the cursor is on X/Y
7

Specify the X/Y position with absolute coordinates for tool change.

(Note 1) This setting is unavailable for machine models which require an X/Y-axis
travel for a tool change.
(Note 2) If either X or Y is set, the Z-axis rises to the tool change position (refer
below), only the set axis moves to the set absolute coordinate position,
and then the tool change motion follows.
(Note 3) The teaching area indicates the machining zero point (X, Y) of the job
where the cursor currently exists. (Note: If the job where the current
cursor exists is a job after a coordinates system is set, the value
indicated is the value of the Z-axis workpiece zero set at the head of a
program + the value in the coordinate system setting job.)

2017/08/23 7 - 29 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 7 Preparation for operation

If the cursor is on Z

Specify the Z-axis return height, whose X/Y axis or rotational axis before or after tool change can
be moved, with the absolute coordinates. If this is not set, the cutting condition <ATC
simultaneous operation start position> is used.

(Note 1) This setting is invalid to the S series or a machine model with a turret
type magazine.
(Note 2) The teaching area indicates the machining zero point as follows:
<ATC simultaneous operation start position> *1 - “Z-axis workpiece zero
in a job where the current cursor exists *2”

7 *1 Refer to “Chapter 6 Cutting Conditions” for further details.


*2 If a job where the current cursor exists is after a coordinate system setting job, the Z-axis
workpiece zero becomes (amount at the Z-axis workpiece zero set at the head of a program +
amount in the coordinate system setting job).

7.7.1 Search function


Use the [F3] (search) key.
If a program is long and big, input a job number and push the [F3] (search) key. Then the cursor
moves to the first tool of the job. Input a job number, [/], and tool number sequentially and push
the [F3] (search) key. Then the cursor moves to the tool set in the job. The tool number here
meaning is a tool order number used but is not a tool list number.

2017/08/23 7 - 30 eCOM3COPR7.doc
Chapter 8 Options

CHAPTER 8 (1)

AUTOMATIC WORKPIECE
MEASUREMENT

1 Before Starting Automatic Workpiece Measurement


2 Probe Detection Signal Method Setting
3 To Set Automatic Workpiece Measurement
4 Automatic Workpiece Measurement Commanding
Method
5 To Process with Measurement Results 8

2019/06/27 8-1-1 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

Automatic Workpiece Measurement Function


List
1.X/Y coordinates of angled boss part

+Z

+Y

+X

2.X/Y coordinates of angled pocket part

+Z

+Y

+X

3.X/Y coordinates of parallel pocket part


+Z

+Y

+X

4.Center X/Y coordinates of parallel boss part


8 +Z

+Y

+X

5.X/Y coordinates of hole center


+Z

+Y

+X

6.X/Y coordinates of circular boss center


+Z

+Y

+X

2019/06/27 8-1-2 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

7.Z-axis coordinate of workpiece top


+Z

+Y

+X

8.Workpiece rotary angle and angle part coordinate position

Workpiece

Rotary angle
Coordinates (X, Y) of angle part

• The angle part X/Y coordinates can be used for measurement and referred as offset amounts
from the reference value specified in a program.
• There are two types of measurement methods as follows:
1. X-axis (2 points) type: To measure 2 points on X-axis and 1 point on Y-axis
2. Y-axis (2 points) type: To measure 1 point on X-axis and 2 points on Y-axis

X axis (2 points) type Y axis (2 points) type


+Y
8
Workpiece
+X
Workpiece

2019/06/27 8-1-3 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

1 Before Starting Automatic


Workpiece Measurement
1. Register an alignment tool in the tool list.
2. Set the user parameter 1 (switch 1) <Probe detection signal method>.
3. Set the necessary parameters in the user parameter (automatic workpiece measurement).
Unless the parameter is correctly set, the probe will be damaged.

2019/06/27 8-1-4 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

2 Probe Detection Signal Method


Setting
Set the following item in the user parameter 1 (switch 1).
Item name Setting range Description
Probe detection 0: Method 1 Set the accuracy of the detection signal that is obtained from the
signal method 1: Method 2 touch probe. Even if the <1: Method 2> increases the travel speed
of the probe more than <0: Method 1>, there is less variation in the
measurement values. As a result, the speed can be set higher than
<Automatic centering speed 2> and <Measurement speed 2>.
However, <1: Method 2> cannot be set due to the machine
structure, and an alarm is triggered.

2019/06/27 8-1-5 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

3 To Set Automatic Workpiece


Measurement
User parameters
Item Content
<Probe compensation 1> Under the condition of a touch probe mounted on the main spindle, set the
<Probe compensation 2> difference between the stylus tip ball center and the main spindle center when a
detection signal goes ON.
The X component of the difference is the <Probe compensation 1>. The Y
component of the difference is the <Probe compensation 2>.
Set an automatic alignment with Probe compensation.

Probe compensation amount

Setting range
-9.999 to 9.999 mm
8 -0.9999 to 0.9999 in.
<Probe compensation 3> Set the difference between the circle center gained by the 3-point measurement
<Probe compensation 4> and the actual circle center when a detection signal goes.
The X component of the difference is the <Probe compensation 3>. The Y
component of the difference is the <Probe compensation 4>.
Set an automatic alignment with Probe compensation.
Setting range
-9.999 to 9.999 mm
-0.9999 to 0.9999 in.

2019/06/27 8-1-6 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

Contents of the user parameter


Item Content
<Measurement motion> <0: Type 1>
<0: Type 1> 1. The detection signal OFF is checked.
<1: Type 2> 2. The probe moves in the specified axis direction at measurement speed 1.
3. When the detection signal goes ON, the probe travel stops.
4. The probe returns by the return amount.
5. The probe moves in the specified axis direction at measurement speed 2.
6. When the detection signal goes ON, the probe travel stops
7. The probe returns to the position 4.
8. The detection signal OFF is checked.

2
4
5
7
Return amount after
measurement
Measurement stop distance

<1: Type 2>


1. The detection signal OFF is checked. 8
2. The probe moves in the specified axis direction at measurement speed 2.
3. When the detection signal goes ON, the probe travel stops.
4. The probe returns by the return amount.
5. The detection signal OFF is checked.

2
4
Return amount after
measurement

Measurement stop distance

2019/06/27 8-1-7 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

Item Content
<Measurement speed 1> Set the first measurement speed of measurement motion (Type 1).

• Probe escape amount = L (mm)


• Skip feed time constant= t(msec)
• Measurement speed 1= F1(mm/min)
• Delay in control system= td(msec)=4(msec)
• Delay unique to probe= tp(msec)

L ≥ ((F1×td) ÷ (60×1000)) +

Overtravel amount due to delay in control system

((F1×t/2) ÷ (60×1000)) +

Overtravel amount
((F1×tp) ÷ (60×1000))

Overtravel amount due to delay unique to probe

F1  (120000L ÷ (8 + t+2×tp))  1.2



Safety rate

Setting range
1 to 5000 mm/min
0.1 to 196.8 in./min
<Measurement speed 2> Set The second measurement starts speed of measurement motion (Type 1) and
measurement speed of measurement motion (Type 2).
• Tolerance in control system = E (mm)
• Measurement speed 2 = F2 (mm/min)
8 • Control system delay = td (msec)
(When probe detection signal method = 0: Method 1)
td (msec)=0.300(msec)
(When probe detection signal method = 1: Method 2)
td (msec)=0.085(msec)
• Margin of error unique to probe=ep(mm)
E ≥ (F2×td) ÷ (60×1000) + ep

F2 ≤ 60000×(E-ep) ÷ td
Setting range
1 to 5000 mm/min
0.1 to 196.8 in./min

2019/06/27 8-1-8 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

Item Content
<Stop point before Set the distance between the probe end of measurement start point and the
measurement> estimated value of the workpiece surface.
If the detection probe skips the distance <Stop point before measurement> +
<Measurement travel limit distance> from this point, the <<Detection signal
off>> alarm appears.

Workpiece face position estimated


by program command

Stop point before


measurement Measurement travel limit
distance

Tool diameter 99

Setting range
0.000 to 99.999 mm
0.0000 to 9.9999 in.
<Measurement travel limit Set the overtravel amount when the measurement skip motion exceeds the
distance> estimated value (program command value).
Setting range
0.000 to 99.999 mm
0.0000 to 9.9999 in.
<Measurement tolerance When the difference between the measurement result and the estimated value
1> (program command value) exceeds the set value, <<Large error in measured 8
value (1)>> alarm appears. If 0 is set, no error can be checked.
Setting range
0.000 to 99.999 mm
0.0000 to 9.9999 in.
<Measurement tolerance When the difference between the measurement result and the previous
2> measurement result exceeds the set value, <<Large error in measured value
(2)>> alarm appears. The following cannot check an error:
• If 0 is set
• First automatic workpiece measurement motion after power supply (First
motion in each of measurement results 1 to 8)
• If there is no previous measurement result
• If the previous measurement type differ from the type of this time
Setting range
0.000 to 99.999 mm
0.0000 to 9.9999 in.
<Return distance after Set the return amount from the position where the measurement probe contacts
measurement> with a workpiece to be measured during automatic measurement.
• Automatic alignment return amount = Lb (mm)
• Automatic alignment time constant = t (ms)
• Automatic alignment speed 2 = F2 (mm/min)

Lb  MAX (1.0, F2 × t/60000)


Setting range
0.000 to 99.999 mm
0.0000 to 9.9999 in.

2019/06/27 8-1-9 eCOM3COPR8-1


Chapter 8 Options

(Note) Setting values like measurement speed, return distance after


measurement, and the like differ depending on the probe used, so ask the
probe maker and decide the setting value.

The travel speed when the automatic workpiece measurement is being performed, when moving to
the measurement start point and when returning from the measurement point, follows the speed
settings for the data bank positioning and the cutting feed.
Confirm that no swarf or the like is attached on the measurement probe tip or the measurement
surface. In addition, make sure that there is no disturbance (caused by vibrations from outside of
the machine) that adversely affects the machine. We will not be responsible for the measuring
accuracy caused by this.
The mode cannot be changed during the automatic workpiece measurement. Attempting to change
the mode will trigger the the alarm <<During measurement>>.
To avoid damaging the probe as well, press the [SINGL] key for the first measurement in the
automatic workpiece measurement operation, and check each motion using the single operation.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 10 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

4 Automatic Workpiece Measurement


Commanding Method
4.1 Angle

+Z

+Y

+X
(X,Y) 8

Command form
Measurement No.: Choose one from the registration numbers 1-4 of measurement results.
By specifying this number to the measurement number item in a
coordinate system setting job process, the measurement result can be
reflected to the coordinates.
Shape: Specify a pocket/boss.
Reference position X/Y: Estimated value of angle
Offset X: X-axis coordinate position in Y-direction measurement. Offset amount
from (X/Y)
Offset Y: Y-axis coordinate position in X-direction measurement. Offset amount
from (X/Y)
Z-axis (Position) (Height) Z coordinate in measurement
Z-axis (Position) (Return) Z coordinate of return position

(Motions)
1. The spindle orients. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start position.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
3. The first measurement starts in the X-axis direction.
4. The Z-axis moves to its return position.
5. The spindle orients. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
6. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
7. The second measurement starts.
8. The Z-axis moves to its return position.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 11 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

When the shape is a boss


The symbols for the offsets in spindle orientation angle and measurement skip travel direction are
as follows:
I: Offset X.
J: Offset Y

1. I > 0, J < 0
+Y

+X
1st measurement

I 2nd measurement

First measurement: + X direction, spindle 0


Second measurement: + Y direction, spindle 0

2. I > 0, J < 0
2nd measurement +Y

I +X

J
8
1st measurement

First measurement: + X direction, spindle 0


Second measurement: - Y direction, spindle 180

3. I < 0, J > 0
+Y

1st
measurement +X

I
2nd measurement

First measurement: + X direction, spindle 180


Second measurement: + Y direction, spindle 0

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 12 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

4. I < 0, J < 0
+Y
2nd measurement

I
+X

1st measurement

First measurement: - X direction, spindle 180


Second measurement: - Y direction, spindle 180

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 13 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

When the shape is a pocket


1. I > 0, J > 0
+Y

1st measurement
+X
J
2nd measurement
I

First measurement: - X direction, spindle 180


Second measurement: - Y direction, spindle 180

2. I > 0, J < 0
+Y

I +X
2nd measurement
J

1st measurement

First measurement: - X direction, spindle 180


Second measurement: + Y direction, spindle 0

3. I < 0, J > 0
1st measurement +Y
8
2nd measurement
J +X
I

First measurement: + X direction, spindle 0


Second measurement: - Y direction, spindle 180

4. I < 0, J < 0
+Y

+X
I

2nd measurement J
1st measurement

First measurement: + X direction, spindle 0


Second measurement: + Y direction, spindle 0

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 14 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

4.2 Parallel

+Z
For pocket
+Y
+X

+Z
For boss
+Y
+X
8

Command form
Measurement No.: Choose one from the registration numbers 1-4 of measurement results.
By specifying this number to the measurement number item in a
coordinate system setting job process, the measurement result can be
reflected to the coordinates.
Shape: Specify a pocket/boss.
Reference position X/Y: Estimated value of pocket (boss) center
Measuring direction: Specify X direction when a shape parallel to Y direction is measured.
Specify Y direction when a shape parallel to X direction is measured
Width: Width of pocket (boss)
Z-axis (Position) (Height): Z coordinate in measurement
Z-axis (Position) (Return): Z coordinate of return position

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 15 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

For a pocket
(Motions)
1. The spindle orients 0. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start position.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
3. The first measurement starts.
4. The spindle orients 180. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
5. The second measurement starts.
6. The Z-axis moves to its return position.

1. Command to X direction
+Y
Width

+X

2nd 1st
measurement measurement

2.Command to Y direction
+Y

+X

1st
Width measurement

2nd
measurement
8

For a boss
(Motions)
1. The spindle orients 180. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start position.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
3. The first measurement starts.
4. The Z-axis moves to its return position.
5. The spindle orients 0. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
6. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
7. The second measurement starts.
8. The Z-axis moves to the return height.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 16 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

3. Command to X direction

Width
+Y

+X
2nd 1st
measurement measurement

4. Command to Y direction
+Y
1st
measurement
+X

Width

2nd
measurement
8

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 17 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

4.3 Circle Center

Command form
Measurement No.: Choose one from the registration numbers 1-4 of measurement results.
By specifying this number to the measurement number item in a
coordinate system setting job process, the measurement result can be
reflected to the coordinates.
Shape: Specify a pocket/boss.
Reference position X/Y: Estimated value of pocket (boss) center
Radius: Radius of a circle to be measured
Meas. points: Specify 3 or 4 points of measuring points.
Z-axis (Position) (Height): Z coordinate in measurement
Z-axis (Position) (Return): Z coordinate of return position

8 Measurement of pocket
+Z
+Y
+X
(X,Y)
Radius

+Z
Measurement of boss (X,Y) +Y
+X

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 18 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

Pocket (3-point measurement)


(Motions)
1. The spindle orients 0. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start position.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
3. The first measurement starts. (+ Y-axis)
4. The spindle orients 0. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
5. The second measurement starts in the direction of angle 120 against the first direction.
6. The spindle orients 0. The X/Y-axis moves to the third measurement start position.
7. The third measurement starts in the direction of angle 240 against the first direction.
8. The Z-axis moves to its return position.

+Y
1st
measurement
+X
3rd
measurement

2nd
measurement

Boss (3-point measurement)


(Motions)
1. The spindle orients 180. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start point.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
3. The first measurement starts in the - Y-axis direction.
4. The Z-axis moves to the return point.
5. The spindle orients 180. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
6. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
7. The second measurement starts in the direction of angle 120 against the first direction. 8
8. The Z-axis moves to the return point.
9. The spindle orients 180. The X/Y-axis moves to the third measurement start position.
10. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
11. The third measurement starts in the direction of angle 240 against the first direction.
12. The Z-axis moves to the return point.
1st measurement
+Y

+X

3rd measurement
2nd measurement

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 19 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

Pocket (4-point measurement)


(Motions)
1. The spindle orients 0. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start position.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
3. The first measurement starts in the + X-axis direction.
4. The spindle orients 180. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
5. The second measurement starts in the - X-axis direction.
6. The spindle orients 0. The X/Y-axis moves to the third measurement start position.
7. The third measurement starts in the + Y-axis direction.
8. The spindle orients 180. The X/Y-axis to the fourth measurement starts position.
9. The fourth measurement starts in the - Y-axis direction.
10. The Z-axis moves to its return position.
+Y
3rd
measurement
+X
2nd
measurement
1st
measurement
4th
measurement

Boss (4-point measurement)


1. The spindle orients 180. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start point.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
3. The first measurement starts in the - X-axis direction.
4. The Z-axis moves to the return point.
5. The spindle orients 0. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
6. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
8 7. The second measurement starts in the + X-axis direction.
8. The Z-axis moves to the return point.
9. The spindle orients 180. The X/Y-axis moves to the third measurement start position.
10. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
11. 11. The third measurement starts in the - Y-axis direction
12. The Z-axis moves to the return point.
13. The spindle orients 0. The X/Y-axis to the fourth measurement starts position.
14. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.
15. 11. The fourth measurement starts in the + Y-axis direction.
16. The Z-axis moves to the return point.
3rd measurement +Y

+X

2nd measurement 1st measurement

4th measurement

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 20 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

4.4 Z-axis Height

+Z
+Y
+X

Command form
Measurement No.: Choose one from the registration numbers 1-4 of measurement results.
By specifying this number to the measurement number item in a
coordinate system setting job process, the measurement result can be
reflected to the coordinates.
Reference position X/Y: X/Y coordinates of measuring position
Z-axis (Position) (Height): Estimated value of Z-axis height

(Motions)
1. The spindle orients 0. The X/Y-axis moves to the measurement start position.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement start point.
3. Measurement starts in the - Z-axis direction.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 21 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

4.5 Rotation

Command form
Measurement No.: Choose one from the registration numbers 1-4 of measurement results.
By specifying this number to the measurement number item in a
coordinate system setting job process, the measurement value can be
reflected to each item of coordinate rotation in a coordinate system
setting job process.
Shape: Specify a pocket/boss.
Reference position X/Y: Estimated value of center coordinates in coordinate rotation
Offset X1: X-axis coordinate position in 1st Y measurement
Offset amount from (X/Y)
Offset X2: X-axis coordinate position when 2nd Y-axis measurement starts.
Offset amount from (X/Y)
Offset Y: Y-axis coordinate position in X-axial measurement
8 Offset amount from (X/Y)
Z-axis (Position) (Height) Z-axis coordinate in measurement
Z-axis (Position) (Return) Z-axis coordinate of return position

+Y

+X
Workpiece
3rd
measurement
position

(X,Y) 2nd measurement position


1st measurement position

1. The spindle orients. The X/Y-axis moves to the first measurement start position.
2. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height
3. The first measurement starts in the X-axis direction.
4. The Z-axis moves to its return position.
5. The spindle orients. The X- and Y-axes move to the second measurement start positions.
6. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height
7. The 2nd measurement starts in the X-axis direction.
8. The Z-axis moves to its return position.
9. The spindle orients. The X/Y-axis moves to the third measurement start position.
10. The Z-axis moves to the measurement height.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 22 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

11. The 3rd measurement starts in the Y-axis direction.


12. The Z-axis moves to its return position.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 23 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

5 To Process with Measurement


Results
5.1 Display Screen of Measurement Results
The results from the zero point automatic workpiece measurement are displayed in item 4
<measurement result> on the <Production monitor> screen.
The measurement results are overwritten each time the automatic workpiece zero point is
measured.
If you want to change the value of a measurement result, move the cursor to the position you want
to change, and input a value. (Only the last data can be changed.)
However, the type of measurement cannot be changed.

8 You can switch measurement results 1 to 4 by pushing the function keys [F1] to [F4].
To delete a measurement result, push the [F5] key.
You can delete the measurement result per measurement number.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 24 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

5.2 To Reflect Measurement Results to Workpiece


Coordinate System
You can reflect measurement result to coordinates by specifying the measurement number in a
coordinate system setting job process.
If a number is set in <Measurement No.>, the measurement result offset amount corresponding to
the number is calculated in the coordinate system setting job process. In addition, if the
measurement is for rotation, the setting values for coordinate rotation angle and center (X/Y) are
neglected and the value of the measurement result is used.

(Note) The measurement value is acquired by this function, and the true value
varies depending on the delay that is unique to the probe. Therefore,
contact the probe manufacturer and adjust it accordingly.

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 25 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

(This page was intentionally left blank.)

2019/06/27 8 - 1 - 26 eCOM3COPR8-1
Chapter 8 Options

CHAPTER 8 (2)

INDEX TABLE

1 MDI Operation
2 Machining Program Using Rotary Axis (Index Table)

2013/12/18 8-2-1 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

1 MDI Operation
Rotary axes are rotatable by block operation in MDI.

1.1 Input Items for MDI Operation

The A/B axis can be rotated by setting and starting the following screen items:

• <Coord. set>
<1: On>
• <Axis travel>
<0: Pos. setting>
<1: Workpiece zero return>
<2: Zero return>
8 <3: Zero return(No.2) >
<4: Zero return(No.3) >
• <A>
• <B>
• <Radius>: (When cutting is specified)
• <Feed>
<0: Positioning>
<1: Cutting>
• <Feedrate>

2013/12/18 8-2-2 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

Item Explanation
<Coord. set> If a coordinate system needs to be set, set <1: On>.
When it is set, the current machine coordinate position of the A/B-axis becomes the
workpiece zero.
<Axis travel> Move the X, Y, Z, A, and B axes to the following positions:
• <X> 0: Pos. setting
• <Y> 1: Workpiece zero return
• <Z> 2: Zero return
• <A> 3: Zero return(No.2)
• <B> 4: Zero return(No.3)
• <Rad.> If the A-axis or B-axis is moved, it is necessary to input a cutting surface radius value.
<Axis travel> The axis type that can move varies depending on the combination with feeding methods.
<0: Pos. setting> 1) When <0: Positioning> is selected for the <Feed>, all the axes can move
(X) simultaneously.
(Y) The rotational direction of the A/B axis is always in the shortest way.
(Z) If the angle in the rotational directions (+ and -) is the same (example 180°), the axis
rotates in the plus (+) direction. The following is the example of the B-axis and the A axis
(A) is the same as for the B-axis:
(B) (Note) If the B-axis stroke is set with <1: Yes>, the B-axis may happen to
(<Feed>: rotate in the longest way due to the limit of the +B/-B stroke limit
<0: Positioning>) value or a alarm of <<Limit exceeded>> may appear.

B-axis machine coordinates


-450° -360° -270° -180° -90° 0°
90° 180° 270° 360° 450°
(-B) (+B)
Stroke limit area

B-axis absolute coordinates



8
270° 0° 90° 180° 270° 90° 180° 270° 0°
(-B) (+B)
Example 1
If B00.000 is input, the
Example 3 B-axis rotates 90° in
If B0.000 is input, the the minus direction.
B-axis rotates 225° in the Example 2
plus direction. If B180.000 is input, the B-axis
B-axis machine zero rotates 180° in the plus direction.

B-axis workpiece zero


Current B-axis position

In the case of example 3


When the axes move in the shortest way, the minus (-) direction is nearer but the stroke
limit (-B) is set at 180°. So the axes move in the longest way so that they do not
overtravel the set value.
-180° -90° 0° 90° 180° 270°

Stroke limit area


0° 90° 180° 270°
(-B) (+B)
Detour
Shortcut
<<Limit over (-B)>> alarm occurs

2013/12/18 8-2-3 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

Item explanation
<Axis travel> 2) If <1: Cutting> is selected for <Feed>,
Machines which are subject to Export Trade Control Orders are able to give simultaneous
<0: Pos. setting>
commands for up to 3 direct axes + 2 additional axes.
(X) Machines for which such Orders do not apply are able to give simultaneous commands
(Y) for up to 3 direct axes + 1 additional axis.
If a command for 2 additional axes is given to a non-applicable machine, an <<Invalid
(Z) command>> alarm will occur.
(A) In addition, if an additional axis command is given when there is no additional axis
(B) option, a <<No *-axis option>> alarm will occur.
The rotation direction during A axis and B axis cutting will be the rotation direction listed
(<Feed>: for “1) When <0: Positioning> is selected for the <Feed>,” above.
<1: Cutting>) The B axis stroke has been set to <1: Yes>, operation will be carried out in accordance
with the (Notes) for “1) When <0: Positioning> is selected for the <Feed>,” above.

B-axis machine coordinates

-450° -360° -270° -180° -90° 0°


90° 180° 270° 360° 450°
(-B) (+B)
Stroke limit area
B-axis absolute coordinate

180° 270° 0° 90° 180° 270° 90° 180° 270° 0°


(-B) (+B)
If B180.000 is input, the
B-axis rotates 270° in
the + direction.
If B-180.000 is input, the B-axis
If B90.000 is input, the rotates 270° in the – direction
<<Limit-over (-B)>>
If B-90.000 is input, the
8 alarm appears and the
B-axis does not rotate. <<Limit-over (-B)>> alarm If B20.000 is input, the
<<Limit-over (-B)>> alarm
appears and the B-axis
does not rotate. appears and the B-axis does
not rotate.
B-axis machine zero
B-axis workpiece zero
(Note 1) In B-axis cutting, only one axis moves all the time.
(Note 2) In B-axis cutting, it is necessary to input a radius value of a cut
surface.
<1. Workpiece The Z-axis returns to its machine zero. The X, Y, A, and B axes return to their workpiece
zero return> zero set in a memory operation or MDI operation.
The return order is the Z-axis first returns to its workpiece zero and then the X, Y, A and
B axes return to their workpiece zero simultaneously.
(Note)
The rotational direction and rotational angle when returning to their rotary
axis workpiece zero differ depending on the specification of <* -axis stroke
control> (<0: No>, <1: Yes>).
<2. Zero return> Return X, Y, Z, A, and B axes to their machine zeros respectively.
The return order is the Z-axis first returns to its workpiece zero and then the X, Y, A and
B axes return to their workpiece zero simultaneously.
(Note)
The rotational direction and rotational angle when returning to their rotary
axis workpiece zero differ depending on the specification of <* -axis stroke
control> (<0: No>, <1: Yes>).

2013/12/18 8-2-4 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

Item explanation
<Rad.> Set a radius value for a cutting surface when the rotary axis is moved in the cutting mode.
(Feedrate) How to calculate the B-axis rotation speed from a specified speed

Specified Degree: B-axis rotary speed (°/min)


-1
feedrate N: B-axis rotary speed (min )
C: Feedrate (mm/min)
π: Circumference ratio
R: Radius of cut face (mm)
B-axis Radius
rotational
center

F
Deg (Degree /min) = 180×F N (rpm) =
π×R 2×π×R

(Note 1) If the calculated B axis speed exceeds the <Max. cutting rotation
speed> in the machine parameter, the alarm <<Feedrate error>> is
triggered.
However, if the <Max. cutting rotation speed> is greater than the
<Rapid feed rate> in the machine parameters, when the calculated
B axis speed exceeds the <Rapid feed rate> in the machine
parameter, the alarm <<Feedrate error>> is triggered
(Note 2) If both A and B axes are specified, the same radius is applied.
<Feed> Select one from the following X, Y, Z, A, and B axis feeding methods:
<0: Positioning>  Each axis moves to its position specified by <High rotation speed>
in the databank and machine parameter.
<1: Cutting>  Each axis travels at the set feedrate in the cutting mode.
<2: Tapping>  Tapping feedrate is decided by the spindle rotational frequency and
the machining tool pitch.
<Feedrate> Travel speed (mm/min) in cutting 8

2013/12/18 8-2-5 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

1.2 To Perform MDI Operation


1.2.1 To arbitrarily index angle (positioning)
The B-axis is positioned at 45°. The A-axis can also be positioned as done by the B-axis.

1. Push the [MDI] key and call the block operation screen in the MDI mode.
2. Move the cursor to <Axis travel>. Input [0] (0: Pos. setting) and push the [ENT] key.
3. Move the cursor to <B>. Input [45.] and push the [ENT] key.
4. Move the cursor to <Feed>. Input [0] (0: Pos. setting) and push the [ENT] key.
5. Push the [START] switch. The B-axis rotates and is positioned at 45° in high-speed.
6. Push the [POS] key to call the current position screen and check that the B-axis absolute
coordinate position is at 45°.

2013/12/18 8-2-6 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

1.2.2 To arbitrarily index angle (cutting)


The B-axis is positioned at 180°. The A-axis can also be positioned as done by the B-axis.

1. Push the [MDI] key and call the block operation screen in the MDI mode.
2. Move the cursor to <Axis travel>. Input [0] (0: Pos. setting) and push the [ENT] key.
3. Move the cursor to <B>. Input [180.] and push the [ENT] key.
The screen indicates a message to ask about radius. Input 50mm.
4. Input [50.] and push the [ENT] key.
5. Move the cursor to <Feed>.
6. Input [1] (Cutting) and push the [ENT] key.
7. Move the cursor to <Feedrate>.
8. Input [200] and push the [ENT] key.
9. Push the [START] key.
10. Rotate the B-axis to 180° at the specified cutting feedrate in the plus (+) direction.
11. Push the [POS] key to call the current position display screen. Check that the B-axis current
position is 180.000.

(Note) Depending on the setting of the B-axis stroke, a <<limit-over>> alarm may
appear.

Cutting surface

+ direction
50
B-axis Radius
rotational
center When the B axis moves by 180°
in cutting mode.

2013/12/18 8-2-7 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

2 Machining Program Using Rotary


Axis (Index Table)
2.1 To Newly Create Machining Data Using Index
Table
You can create a program for an index table by specifying the A/B axis workpiece zero (value
other than “?”).

(Note) Before starting cutting operation, be sure to program indexing


(positioning) of the index table.

2.2 Workpiece zero of Rotary Axis (Index Table)


A program can have a rotary axis workpiece zero at the head of the program.
Decide which point should be the workpiece zero.

There are two ways of setting a B-axis workpiece zero: one is to directly input a value as follows
and the other is to set the current B-axis position value as the B-axis workpiece zero.

• If you want to specify 90°, input [90.] and push the [ENT] key.

• If you want to use the current B-axis position value as the B-axis workpiece zero
1. Push the [MANU] key to call the manual operation mode.
2. Manually rotate the B-axis to the new workpiece zero angle position you want to set.
3. Push the [EDIT] key to call the program edit mode and call the program screen.
4. Input [1] (1. Machining data) and push the [ENT] key.
5. Input a program number and push the [ENT] key.
6. Move the cursor to <Workpiece zero><B>.
7. Push the [F5] (Set workpiece zero) key. Then the following screen appears.

2013/12/18 8-2-8 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

8. Check the set workpiece zero value indicated on the screen. If it is to be set, push the [F0]
(Set) key. If not, push the [F1] (Not set) key.
9. Confirm that the B-axis setting value becomes the one for the current machine position.

2.3 To Set Index Table Plane for Rotary Axis


If you use an index table, use Job No. 14 (Coordinate system setting job).
Only this job is available for indexing a plane angle of the A- and B-axes.
In addition, the contents specified in this job are effective to until the next coordinate system is set.
Before starting cutting a workpiece, index (position) the index table without fail.
(Also when the program finishes, even if the index table has been indexed, index (position) the
index table to the same position before cutting a workpiece.)

2013/12/18 8-2-9 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc


Chapter 8 Options

2.3.1 Angle
The A/B axis is indexed  the angle is between 0 and 359.999°.
The minus (-) symbol is unusable. The angle must be an absolute value.
When the B-axis moves from an indexed plane to the next index plane, it is automatic indexed to
the angle specified here. If no value is set but [?] is set, the angle is the value set in the last
coordinate system setting job. However, if there is no coordinate system setting job before, setting
[?] does not index the B-axis. This goes the same with the A-axis.

Job 01 02-10 Job 11 12-20 Job 21 21-30 Job 31 32


B-axis Machining B-axis machining B-axis Machining B-axis Machining
index job index job index job index job
Angle Angle Angle Angle
0.000 90.000 180.000 ?
Face 0° is Face 90° is Face 180° is Face 180° is
indexed and indexed and indexed and indexed and
machining starts. machining starts. machining starts. machining continues.

(Note) The B-axis is always indexed in the shortest path. If both plus (+) and
minus (-) directions are set with the same angle (example 180°), the
B-axis rotates in the plus (+) direction.
If the B-axis stroke (<0: No>, <1: Yes>) is set as <1: Yes>, the B-axis
rotates in the longest way due to the +B/-B stroke limit value or the
<<limit-over>> alarm may happen to occur.

2.3.2 Workpiece zero


Specify each workpiece zero per index angle with the relative amount from the workpiece zero of
the program head.

Setting example Workpiece zero of


of the above the program head
-50
-150
Workpiece zero of job 1

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 10 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Setting example Workpiece zero of


of the above -50 the program head

-80
Workpiece zero of job 1

(Reference) If no value is set but [?] is specified, the value becomes the same for the workpiece
zero specified in the last coordinate system setting job. However, if there is no
B-axis index plane before and [?] is set, it becomes the same value as for the B-axis 8
workpiece zero at the program head.

2.3.3 Return height between coordinates


The Z-axis return height which does not interfere with a tool is specified with the height from the
Z-axis workpiece zero.
When the Z-axis moves from an indexed plane to the next Z-axis return plane, the maximum
height of the Z-axis return heights among the passing indexing plane angles is used as the Z-axis
return height.

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 11 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

90° workpiece 0° plane


zero Z
90° plane 0° plane index return
index return zero point Z
zero point Z

0° workpiece zero Z
270° workpiece
zero Z

90° plane
B-axis index table
180° workpiece 270° plane index return
rotation center
zero Z zero point Z

180° plane index return

With respect to the above workpiece,


1. To index the 0° plane to 90°, the indexing return height “B” of the 90° plane is larger than the
indexing return height “A” of the 0° plane, so “B” is used.
2. To index the 0° plane to 270°, the indexing return height “A” is larger than “D”, so “A” is
used.

(Reference 1) One indexing return height can be set per indexing angle. If there are several settings
for a same indexing angle and different indexing return heights are set, the
maximum return height of them is the indexing return height.
The following figure show an example of the B-axis but it goes the same with the
A-axis.
8
To set the B-axis indexing plane of the first workpiece

Return height A

To set the B-axis indexing plane of the second workpiece

To set the B-axis indexing plane of the third workpiece

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 12 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

With respect to the above example, the indexing return height of the indexing plane
90° becomes the highest value “C”.

(Reference 2) If no value is set but [?] is specified, the value becomes the same for the indexing
return height set in the last coordinate system setting job. However, if there is no
B-axis index plane before and [?] is set, it becomes the same value as for the return
height between jobs at the program head.

2.3.4 Return between jobs


The Z-axis return height when one set job goes to the other in a set coordinate system setting job,
it is specified with the height from the Z-axis workpiece zero.
Ex) Set the height of “A” for the return between jobs in a 0° plane coordinate system setting job.

Return between jobs of 0 degree plane

A
Workpiece zero on 0 degree plane

B-axis index table rotation center

(Reference 1) If no value is set but [?] is specified, the value becomes the same for the return
height between jobs. However, if there is no coordinate system setting job before
and [?] is set, it becomes the same value as for the return height between jobs at the
program head.

0° plane
8

A B A B

Workpiece 1 Workpiece 2

Return between job of part B which


interferes with Workpiece 1
Return between job of part A

100mm

Workpiece zero Z of indexing plane 0°

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 13 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Indexing plane Part A Job 01: B-axis, angle 0.000


angle 0° Coordinate system setting
:
Return between jobs: 100.000
:
Job 02: Hole
job 03: Tap
Job 04: Tap
Part B Job 05: B-axis, Angle 0.000
Coordinate system setting
:
Return between jobs: 150.000
:
Job 06: Hole
Job 07; Hole

(Reference 2) With respect to a travel between workpieces in a same coordinate system setting job
for multiple workpieces, even if it is a travel in the same indexing plane (0° plane),
the travel between workpieces in the same indexing plane is to the return value
between the maximum jobs of the coordinate system setting job set with the same
indexing angle for safety as shown above. This is because a tool may interfere with
other workpiece when the tool passes through other coordinate system setting job
due to the relationship of the workpieces with their arrangements and machining
order.

2.3.5 Job type <10. Axis travel> of machining data and


rotary axis
Travels of the A- and B-axes can be set in the machining data.

1. Input [10] (10. Axis travel) and push the [ENT] key.
2. Select a necessary one from the items indicated in the teaching data area as indicated below
and push the [ENT] key.
<6. B-axis machine zero return> <11. A-axis machine zero return>
<7. B-axis workpiece zero return> <12. A-axis workpiece zero return>
<8. Specify B-axis angle> <13. Specify A-axis angle>

(Reference) For the B-axis zero point return, B-axis workpiece zero for machining, rotational
direction to specify angle, etc., refer to the above “Input Items for MDI Operation.”

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 14 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

2.4 Motion Program


2.4.1 Rotary axis (index table) motion types
For using the A- and B-axes, the following item are added to the motion program as rotary axes.

1. Positioning group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanation on motions
motion call job
A- axis machine The A-axis is returned to the machine zero.
zero return (Note)
The rotational direction and rotational angle
of zero point return differ depending on the
setting of the A-axis stroke limit.
Refer to “Input Items for MDI Operation”.
A-axis workpiece The A-axis is returned to the workpiece zero.
zero return (Note)
The rotational direction and rotational angle
of the workpiece zero return differ depending
on the setting of the A-axis stroke limit.
Refer to “Input Items for MDI Operation”.
B-axis machine The B-axis is returned to the machine zero.
zero return (Note)
The rotational direction and rotational angle
of the zero point return differ depending on
the setting of the B-axis stroke.
Refer to “Input Items for MDI Operation”.
B-axis workpiece The B-axis is returned to the workpiece zero.
zero return (Note)
The rotational direction and rotational angle
of the workpiece zero return differ depending
on the setting of the B-axis stroke.
Refer to “Input Items for MDI Operation”.
Specified axis X, Y, Z, B, A The specified axis positions at a coordinate value.
Specified axis + X, Y, Z, B, A, When any of the axes is specified to position at a 8
Spindle direction, coordinate value, the main spindle also rotates
rotational imultaneously.
frequency

2. Cutting group
Setting item in
Motion type Explanation on motions
motion call job
Specified axis X, Y, Z, B, A, The specified axis travels to a specified position at a
feed, radius specified feedrate in the cutting mode. Up to four
axes can be simultaneously specified.
(However, any one of A and B axes can be specified
depending on countries.)
Specified axis + X, Y, Z, B, A, When the specified axis travels to a specified position
Spindle direction, at a specified feedrate in the cutting mode, the main
rotational spindle also simultaneously rotates. Up to four axes
frequency, can be simultaneously specified.
feed, radius (However, any one of A and B axes can be specified
depending on countries.)

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 15 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Value setting area for motion programs


Item Setting area
A Positioning (absolute): 0 to 359.999
Positioning (incremental): -9999.999 to 9999.999
Cutting (absolute): -359.999 to 359.999
Cutting (incremental): -9999.999 to 9999.999
B Positioning (absolute): 0 to 359.999
Positioning (incremental): -9999.999 to 9999.999
Cutting (absolute): -359.999 to 359.999
Cutting (incremental): -9999.999 to 9999.999
Radius 0.001 to 999.999
[Reference]
When the rotary axis is commanded to position or cut incrementally, it rotates by the amount of
the specified command value. (It does not rotate in the shortest path.)
The following example shows the B-axis. However, the A-axis is also the same.

0° 90° 180° 270° 90° 180° 270° 90° 0° 90°


(-B) (+B)
[B450.000]
The axis rotates 450° in the [B-180.000]
plus direction. The axis rotates 180° in the
minus direction

2.4.2 To specify cutting by A- or B-axis (index table) in


motion program
• Feeding unit is mm/min.
• The rotational direction and rotation speed in cutting by the rotary axes differ depending on
the specifications of the minus (-) symbol, user parameter <*axis stroke control>, <1: Yes>,
<0: No>, etc.
• The method to calculate a rotation speed from a specified feedrate is as follows:
8

Specified feedrate (mm/min)

半径

Deg: B-axis rotary speed (degree/min)


N: B-axis rotary speed (min-1)
C: Feedrate (mm/min)
π: Circumference ratio
R: Radius of cut plane (mm)

180 × F F
Deg : (degree/min) = N(min-1)=
π×R 2×π×R

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 16 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

2.5 If A- axis or B-axis Has a Clamping Mechanism


2.5.1 A- axis or B-axis rotation (servo system off when
clamped)
The B-axis rotates in the following order. (The A-axis also rotates in the same way.)

1. The B-axis is unclamped. Here, the servo system of the B-axis simultaneously goes on.
2. After an unclamp check signal is input, it waits for the time set by the machine parameter
<Pause after *-axis unclamp>.
3. The B-axis rotates.
4. After the rotation, it waits for the time set by the machine parameter <Pause after * -axis
positioning> .
5. The B-axis is clamped.
6. After the clamp check signal is input, it waits for the time set by the machine parameter
<Pause after * -axis clamp>.
7. The servo system of the B-axis goes off. (The motions finish.)

(Reference) When the B-axis moves simultaneously with a tool change or when the B-axis goes
into a status other than a cutting motion like the following, unclamping or clamping
of the B-axis may happen to occur together with other motions.

2.5.2 Operation while a rotary axis is unclamped


Normally, the B-axis stops working while it is clamped. However, by commanding the signal
output 440 (unclamping the B-axis), the B-axis can work while it is unclamped. (This goes the
same with the A-axis.)

Code Contents of motions


440 The B-axis is unclamped.
After that, unclamping or clamping of the B-axis is not automatically
controlled. (It stays unclamped.)
441 The B-axis is clamped.
After that, unclamping or clamping of the B-axis is automatically controlled.
442 The A-axis is unclamped. 8
After that, unclamping or clamping of the A-axis is not automatically
controlled. (It stays unclamped.)
443 The A-axis is clamped.
After that, unclamping or clamping of the A-axis is automatically controlled.

Output of signals 440, 441, 442, and 443 can be set by “Miscellaneous function” or “Motion call
job” of the “Signal output job” or by “Miscellaneous function before/after cutting” of “Tool
assignment”.

If any one of the following is operated during unclamping of the B-axis (signal 440), the B-axis is
clamped. After that, the B-axis becomes the same status as the signal 441 output. This goes the
same with the A-axis.
• Program ends.
• The [RST] key is pushed.
• Operation is reset.
• Start point is set
• An axis is machine zero return or tool change by manual mode or MDI mode.

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 17 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

2.5.3 Sample program

0° plane
270° plane
90° plane

180° plane

Program head

40
8
[Job 07: Tap]
M2P0.4 Depth 5
20
Depth 5
[Job 08: Hole]

10 10 10
10
φ5

20

10
20
M2P0.4
Seat diameter φ5
[Job 10: Counter boring tap]
10

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 18 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

[Job 07: Tap]


M2P0.4 Depth 5
40

[Job 08:Hole]
φ5 Depth5

20
10

180° plane
10 10 10 10
270° plane

20
[Job 10: Tap]
M2P0.4
Counter boring dia. φ5

20
10

10

Machining surface 1: Program of 0° plane

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 19 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Indexed return position 15 Z Return position between job

15

2
Z-axis workpiece zero

B-axis index table


rotation center

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 20 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Machining surface 2: Program of 90° plane

Indexed return position Return position


between job

Z-axis workpiece zero 2


5
3

B-axis index table


rotation center

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 21 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Machining surface 3: Program of 180° plane

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 22 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Indexed return position

15 Return position between


job 2
2

B-axis index table


rotation center

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 23 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
Chapter 8 Options

Return position between job


Indexed return position

B-axis index table


rotation center

2013/12/18 8 - 2 - 24 eCOM3COPR8-2.doc
(This page was intentionally left blank.)
©2012-2019 BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD.
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in Japan.
This is the original instructions.

693728001
1908 (10)

eCOM3COPROKU

You might also like